Zoom out
Zoom in
Vorherige Seite
1/181
Nächste Seite
imagine the possibilities
Thank you for purchasing this Samsung product.
To receive more complete service,
please register your product at
www.samsung.com/register
7.1CH Blu-ray™
Home Entertainment System
user manual
HT-F9750W
HT-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0315.indd 1HT-F9750W-M.E.Asia_ENG-0315.indd 1 2013-03-15 오후 3:08:462013-03-15 오후 3:08:46
1

Brauchen Sie Hilfe? Stellen Sie Ihre Frage.

Forenregeln

Inhalt der Seiten


  • Page 1

    HT-F9750W

    7.1CH Blu-ray™
    Home Entertainment System
    user manual

    imagine the possibilities
    Thank you for purchasing this Samsung product.
    To receive more complete service,
    please register your product at

    www.samsung.com/register



  • Page 2

    Safety Information
    Warning
    TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE THE COVER(OR BACK).
    NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS ARE INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.

    CAUTION
    RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
    DO NOT OPEN

    This symbol indicates “dangerous
    voltage” inside the product that
    presents a risk of electric shock
    or personal injury.

    CAUTION: TO PREVENT ELECTRIC SHOCK,
    MATCH WIDE BLADE OF PLUG TO WIDE
    SLOT, FULLY INSERT.

    WARNING
    • To reduce the risk of fire or electric shock, do not
    expose this appliance to rain or moisture.

    CAUTION
    • Apparatus shall not be exposed to dripping or
    splashing and no objects filled with liquids, such as
    vases, shall be placed on the apparatus.
    • The Mains plug is used as a disconnect device and
    shall stay readily operable at any time.
    • This apparatus shall always be connected to an AC
    outlet with a protective grounding connection.
    • To disconnect the apparatus from the mains, the plug
    must be pulled out from the mains socket, therefore
    the mains plug shall be readily operable.

    | 2 English

    CLASS 1
    KLASSE 1
    LUOKAN 1
    KLASS 1
    PRODUCTO

    This symbol indicates
    important instructions
    accompanying the product.

    LASER PRODUCT
    LASER PRODUKT
    LASER LAITE
    LASER APPARAT
    LÁSER CLASE 1

    CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
    This Compact Disc player is classified as a CLASS 1
    LASER product.
    Use of controls, adjustments or performance of
    procedures other than those specified herein may result
    in hazardous radiation exposure.

    CAUTION
    • INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN AND
    INTERLOCKS DEFEATED, AVOID EXPOSURE TO
    BEAM.



  • Page 3

    Disc Storage & Management

    • Do not expose this apparatus to dripping or splashing.
    Do not put objects filled with liquids, such as vases, on
    the apparatus.
    • To turn this apparatus off completely, you must pull the
    power plug out of the wall socket. Consequently, the
    power plug must be easily and readily accessible at all
    times.
    • Do not touch the power plug with a wet hand.
    It can cause an electric shock.
    • Do not plug multiple electric devices into the same wall
    socket. Overloading a socket can cause it to overheat,
    resulting in a fire.
    • Maintenance of the Cabinet
    - Before connecting other components to this
    product, be sure to turn them off.
    - If you move your product suddenly from a cold place
    to a warm place, condensation may occur on the
    operating parts and lens and cause abnormal disc
    playback. If this occurs, unplug the product, wait for
    two hours, and then connect the plug to the power
    outlet. Then, insert the disc, and try to play back
    again.

    Manufactured under licence
    from Dolby Laboratories.
    Dolby, Pro Logic, and
    the double-D symbol are
    trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.

    Manufactured under a licence from U.S. Patent
    No’s: 5,956,674, 5,974,380, 5,978,762, 6,487,535,
    6,226,616, 7,212,872, 7,003,467, 7,272,567,
    7,668,723, 7,392,195, 7,930,184, 7,333,929 and
    7,548,853. DTS, DTS-HD, the Symbol, and DTS
    or DTS-HD and the Symbol together are registered
    trademarks & DTS Neo:Fusion is a trademark of DTS,
    Inc. ©2012 DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

    ABOUT DIVX VIDEO: DivX®
    is a digital video format
    created by DivX, LLC, a
    subsidiary of Rovi Corporation. This is an official DivX
    Certified® device that plays DivX video. Visit divx.com
    for more information and software tools to convert
    your files into DivX videos.
    ABOUT DIVX VIDEO-ON-DEMAND: This DivX
    Certified® device must be registered in order to play
    purchased DivX Video-on-Demand (VOD) movies. To
    obtain your registration code, locate the DivX VOD
    section in your device setup menu. Go to vod.divx.
    com for more information on how to complete your
    registration.
    DivX Certified® to play DivX® video up to HD 1080p,
    including premium content.
    DivX®, DivX Certified® and associated logos are
    trademarks of Rovi Corporation or its subsidiaries and
    are used under licence.
    Covered by one or more of the following U.S. patents
    : 7,295,673; 7,460,668; 7,515,710; 7,519,274

    English

    3|

    Safety Information

    Handling Cautions

    Licence

    01

    • Holding Discs
    - Fingerprints or scratches on
    a disc may reduce sound and
    picture quality or cause skipping.
    - Avoid touching the surface of a disc where data has
    been recorded.
    - Hold the disc by the edges so that fingerprints will
    not get on the surface.
    - Do not stick paper or tape on the disc.
    • Cleaning Discs
    - If you get fingerprints or dirt on a disc,
    clean it with a mild detergent diluted
    in water and wipe with a soft cloth.
    - When cleaning, wipe gently from the
    inside to the outside of the disc.
    - Disc Storage
     Do not keep in direct sunlight.
     Keep in a cool ventilated area.
     Keep in a clean protection jacket and store
    vertically.

    • If the product makes an abnormal noise or produces
    a burning smell or smoke, turn off the power switch
    immediately and disconnect the power plug from
    the wall outlet. Then, contact the nearest customer
    service centre for technical assistance. Do not use the
    product. Using the product as it is may cause a fire or
    an electric shock.



  • Page 4

    Safety Information
    The terms HDMI and HDMI
    High-Definition Multimedia
    Interface, and the HDMI
    Logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of
    HDMI Licencing LLC in the United States and other
    countries.
    Oracle and Java are registered trademarks
    of Oracle and/or its affiliates. Other names
    may be trademarks of their respective
    owners.
    This item incorporates copy protection technology
    that is protected by U.S. patents and other intellectual
    property rights of Rovi Corporation. Reverse engineering
    and disassembly are prohibited.
    Blu-ray Disc™, Blu-ray™, and the logos are trademarks
    of Blu-ray Disc Association.
    This product uses Cinavia technology to limit the
    use of unauthorized copies of some commerciallyproduced film and videos and their soundtracks. When
    a prohibited use of an unauthorized copy is detected, a
    message will be displayed and playback or copying will
    be interrupted.
    More information about Cinavia technology is provided
    at the Cinavia Online Consumer Information Centre
    at http://www.cinavia.com. To request additional
    information about Cinavia by mail, send a postcard with
    your mailing address to: Cinavia Consumer Information
    Centre, P.O. Box 86851, San Diego, CA, 92138, USA.”
    This product incorporates proprietary technology
    under licence from Verance Corporation and is
    protected by U.S. Patent 7,369,677 and other U.S.
    and worldwide patents issued and pending as well
    as copyright and trade secret protection for certain
    aspects of such technology. Cinavia is a trademark of
    Verance Corporation. Copyright 2004-2010 Verance
    Corporation. All rights reserved by Verance. Reverse
    engineering or disassembly is prohibited.
    - Open Source Licence Notice
    In the case of using open source software, Open
    Source Licences are available on the product menu.

    | 4 English

    Using the 3D Function
    IMPORTANT HEALTH AND SAFETY INFORMATION FOR
    3D PICTURES.
    Read and understand the following safety information
    before using the 3D function.
    • Some viewers may experience discomfort while viewing
    3D TV such as dizziness, nausea, and headaches.
    If you experience any such symptom, stop viewing 3D
    TV, remove the 3D Active Glasses, and rest.
    • Watching 3D images for an extended period of time
    may cause eye strain. If you feel eye strain, stop
    viewing 3D TV, remove your 3D Active Glasses, and
    rest.
    • A responsible adult should frequently check on children
    who are using the 3D function.
    If there are any reports of tired eyes, headaches,
    dizziness, or nausea, have the child stop viewing 3D
    TV and rest.
    • Do not use the 3D Active Glasses for other purposes
    (such as general eyeglasses, sunglasses, protective
    goggles, etc.)
    • Do not use the 3D function or 3D Active Glasses while
    walking or moving around. Using the 3D function or 3D
    Active Glasses while moving around may cause you to
    bump into objects, trip, and/or fall, and cause serious
    injury.
    • If you want to enjoy 3D content, connect a 3D device
    (3D compliant AV receiver or TV) to the product’s HDMI
    OUT port using a high-speed HDMI cable. Put on 3D
    glasses before playing the 3D content.
    • The product outputs 3D signals only through HDMI
    cable connected to the HDMI OUT port.
    • As the video resolution in 3D play mode is fixed
    according to the resolution of the original 3D video, you
    can not change the resolution to your preference.
    • Some functions such as BD Wise, screen size
    adjustment, and resolution adjustment may not operate
    properly in 3D play mode.
    • You must use a high-speed HDMI cable for proper
    output of the 3D signal.
    • Stay at least three times the width of the screen from
    the TV when watching 3D images. For example, if
    you have a 46 inch screen, stay 3.5 meters from the
    screen.
    • Place the 3D video screen at eye level for the best 3D
    picture.
    • When the product is connected to some 3D devices,
    the 3D effect may not function properly.
    • This product does not convert 2D content into 3D.
    • “Blu-ray 3D” and “Blu-ray 3D” logo are trademarks of
    the Blu-ray Disc Association.



  • Page 5

    Copyright

    MEDIA PLAY

    SAFETY INFORMATION
    2
    3
    3
    3
    4
    5

    Warning
    Disc Storage & Management
    Handling Cautions
    Licence
    Using the 3D Function
    Copyright
    GETTING STARTED

    6
    7
    10
    11
    11
    12

    Disk and Format Compatibility
    Logos of Discs the Product can Play
    Accessories
    Front Panel
    Rear Panel
    Remote Control
    CONNECTIONS

    14 Connecting the Speakers
    17 Connecting to TV/External Devices
    18 Connecting to a Network Router
    SETTINGS
    19
    19
    19
    20
    24
    25
    28

    The Initial Settings Procedure
    The Home Screen
    Accessing the Settings Screen
    Settings Menu Functions
    Auto Sound Calibration
    Networks and the Internet
    Upgrading Software

    The All Content Screen
    Playing Commercial Discs
    Playing Files on a USB Device
    Playing a Disc with User Recorded Content
    Using the AllShare Network Function
    Controlling Video Playback
    Controlling Music Playback
    Playing Photo Contents
    Listening to Radio
    Using the Special Effects Remote Control Buttons
    NETWORK SERVICES

    43
    43
    44
    44
    48
    48
    51

    Logging In to Your Samsung Account
    Before Using Movies & TV Shows or Apps
    Using Movies & TV Shows
    Using Apps
    Screen Mirroring
    Using the Web Browser
    Linking your Internet Service Accounts to the
    Product
    51 BD-LIVE™
    APPENDIX
    52 Additional Information
    56 Troubleshooting
    59 Specifications

     Figures and illustrations in this User Manual are
    provided for reference only and may differ from
    actual product appearance.
     An administration fee may be charged if either
    a. an engineer is called out at your request and
    there is no defect in the product (i.e. where
    you have failed to read this user manual)
    b. you bring the unit to a repair centre and there
    is no defect in the product (i.e. where you
    have failed to read this user manual).
     The amount of such administration charge will
    be advised to you before any work or home
    visit is carried out.

    English

    5|

    Safety Information

    Contents

    30
    30
    30
    31
    31
    32
    35
    39
    40
    41

    01

    © 2013 Samsung Electronics Co.,Ltd.
    All rights reserved; No part or whole of this user’s manual
    may be reproduced or copied without the prior written
    permission of Samsung Electronics Co.,Ltd.



  • Page 6

    Getting Started
    Disk and Format Compatibility
    Disc Types and content your Product can Play
    Media

    Disc Type
    Blu-ray Disc
    3D Blu-ray Disc

    VIDEO

    Details
    BD-ROM or BD-RE/-R disc recorded in the BD-RE format.

    DVD-VIDEO, DVD-RW,
    DVD-R, DVD+RW,
    DVD+R

    DVD-VIDEO, recorded DVD+RW/DVD-RW(V)/DVD-R/+R discs that have
    been recorded and finalised, or a USB storage media containing DivX,
    MKV, MP4 contents.

    MUSIC

    CD-RW/-R,
    DVD-RW/-R,
    BD-RE/-R

    Music recorded on CD-RW/-R, DVD-RW/-R, BD-RE/-R discs or a USB
    storage media containing MP3 or WMA contents.

    PHOTO

    CD-RW/-R,
    DVD-RW/-R,
    BD-RE/-R

    Photos recorded on CD-RW/-R, DVD-RW/-R, BD-RE/-R discs or a USB
    storage media containing JPEG contents.

    | NOTES |

    \
    \
    \
    \

    The product may not play certain CD-RW/-R and DVD-R because of the disc type or recording conditions.
    If a DVD-RW/-R disc has not been recorded properly in DVD video format, it will not be playable.
    Your product will not play content that has been recorded on a DVD-R at a bit rate that exceeds 10 Mbps.
    Your product will not play content that has been recorded on a BD-R or USB device at a bit rate that exceeds 30
    Mbps.
    \ Playback may not work for some types of discs, or when you use specific operations, such as angle change
    and aspect ratio adjustment. Information about the discs is written in detail on the disc box. Please refer to this if
    necessary.
    \ When you play a BD-J title, loading may take longer than a normal title or some functions may perform slowly.

    Disc Types your Product cannot Play
    • HD DVD
    • DVD-ROM/PD/MV-Disc,
    etc

    • DVD-RAM
    • Super Audio CD
    (except CD layer)

    • DVD-RW(VR mode)
    • CVD/CD-ROM/CDV/
    CD-G/CD-I/LD
    (CD-Gs play audio only,
    not graphics.)

    • 3.9 GB DVD-R Disc for
    Authoring.

    | NOTES |

    \ This product may not respond to all operating commands because some Blu-ray Disc, DVD, and CD discs allow
    specific or limited operation and provide only certain features during playback.
    Please note that this is not a defect in the product.
    \ Samsung cannot guarantee that this product will play every disc bearing the Blu-ray Disc, DVD or CD logo because
    disc formats evolve, and problems and errors may occur during the creation of Blu-ray Disc, DVD, and CD software
    and/or the manufacture of discs.
    \ Please contact the SAMSUNG Customer Care Centre at, if you have questions or encounter difficulty when playing
    Blu-ray Disc, DVD, or CD discs in this product. Also, refer to rest of this user manual for additional information on
    playback restrictions.
    \ Some commercial discs and DVD discs purchased outside your region may not play on this product.

    | 6 English



  • Page 7

    Region Code

    Logos of Discs the Product can Play

    Region
    Code

    Area

    A

    North America, Central
    America, South America,
    Korea, Japan, Taiwan, Hong
    Kong and South East Asia.

    B

    Europe, Greenland, French
    territories, Middle East, Africa,
    Australia and New Zealand.

    C

    India, China, Russia, Central
    and South Asia.

    1

    The U.S., U.S. territories and
    Canada

    2

    Europe, Japan, the Middle
    East, Egypt, Africa, Greenland

    3

    Taiwan, Korea, the Philippines,
    Indonesia, Hong Kong

    4

    Mexico, South America,
    Central America, Australia,
    New Zealand, Pacific Islands,
    Caribbean

    5

    Russia, Eastern Europe, India,
    North Korea, Mongolia

    6

    China

    Blu-ray Disc

    Blu-ray Disc

    3D Blu-ray Disc

    BD-LIVE

    Dolby

    Getting Started

    Disc Type

    02

    Both products and discs are coded by region. These
    regional codes must match for a disc to play. If the codes
    do not match, the disc will not play.
    The Region Number for this product is displayed on the
    rear panel of the product.

    DTS

    DVD-VIDEO

    PAL broadcast system in U.K,
    France, Germany, etc.

    DivX

    Java

    | NOTES |

    \ If the Region number of a Blu-ray Disc/DVDs
    does not correspond to the Region number of this
    product, the product cannot play the disc.

    English

    7|



  • Page 8

    Getting Started
    Supported Formats
    Video File Support
    File
    Extension

    Container

    Video Codec

    Resolution

    Bit Rate
    (Mbps)

    Audio Codec

    Divx 3.11 / 4
    /5/6

    *.avi
    *.mkv
    *.asf
    *.wmv
    *.mp4
    *.3gp
    *.vro
    *.mpg
    *.mpeg
    *.ts
    *.tp
    *.trp
    *.mov
    *.flv
    *.vob
    *.svi
    *.m2ts
    *.mts
    *.divx

    AVI
    MKV
    ASF
    MP4
    3GP
    MOV
    FLV
    VRO
    VOB
    PS
    TS
    SVAF

    *.webm

    WebM

    MPEG4 SP/ASP
    H.264 BP/
    MP/HP
    Motion JPEG
    Microsoft
    MPEG-4 v3

    1920x1080
    (WMV v7,v8,
    MSMPEG4 v3 :
    1280x720)

    6~30

    30

    Window Media
    Video v7, v8, v9
    MPEG2

    Dolby Digital
    LPCM
    ADPCM
    (IMA, MS)
    AAC
    HE-AAC
    WMA
    Dolby Digital
    Plus
    MPEG(MP3)
    DTS (Core)

    MPEG1
    VP6

    640x480

    -

    4

    MVC

    -

    24/25/30

    60

    VP8

    1920x1080

    6~30

    20

     Limitations
    - Even when a file is encoded by a supported codec
    listed above, the file might not be played if its content
    is defective or corrupted.
    - Normal playback is not guaranteed if the file's container
    information is wrong or the file itself is corrupted.
    - Files having higher bit or frame rates than standard
    may stutter when played back.
    - The seek (skip) function is not available if the file's
    index table is damaged.
    - When you playback a file remotely through a network
    connection, video playback may stutter depending on
    the network speed.
    - Some USB/Digital camera devices may not be
    compatible with the product.

     Video decoder
    - Supports up to H.264 Level 4.1 (except for FMO/ASO/
    RS)
    - Does not support VC1 AP L4
    - Except for WMV v7, v8, MSMPEG4 v3, MVC, VP6
    Below 1280 X 720: 60 frame max
    Above 1280 X 720: 30 frame max

    | 8 English

    Frame rate
    (fps)

    Vorbis

    - Does not support GMC 2 or higher
    - Supports SVAF Top/Bottom, Side by Side Only
    - Supports BD MVC Spec Only

     Audio decoder
    -

    Supports WMA 10 Pro (Up to 5.1)
    Does not support WMA lossless audio.
    Supported ADPCM IMA, MS.
    Does not support ADPCM (A-Law, μ-Low)
    Does not support QCELP, AMR NB/WB
    Supports vorbis (Up to 2ch),
    Supports Dolby Digital Plus (Up to 7.1ch)

     Comments
    -

    MPEG4 : Supports up to GMC 1-Warping Point.
    H.264 : Supports up to BP/MP/HP Level 4.1.
    WMV : Supports V9, VC1 SP/MP/AP L3.
    MPEG1 : Does not support D-picture.
    MPEG2 : Supports up to Hight Profile High Level.



  • Page 9

    ❑ Supported DivX subtitle file formats

    Picture File Support

    *.ttxt, *.smi, *.srt, *.sub, *.txt

    depending on their video resolution and frame rate.

    Music File Support
    File
    Extension

    Container

    Audio
    Codec

    Support Range

    *.mp3

    MPEG

    MPEG1
    Audio
    Layer 3

    -

    File Extension

    Type

    Resolution

    *.jpg
    *.jpeg

    JPEG

    15360x8640

    *.png

    PNG

    4096x4096

    *.bmp

    BMP

    4096x4096

    *.mpo

    MPO

    15360x8640

    Notes on the USB connection

    *.m4a
    *.mpa
    *.aac

    MPEG4

    AAC

    -

    *.flac

    FLAC

    FLAC

    Supports up to
    2ch

    *.ogg

    OGG

    Vorbis

    Supports up to
    2ch

    *.wma

    WMA

    WMA

    Supports WMA 10
    Pro (Up to 5.1)
    Does not support
    WMA lossless
    audio
    Supports up to M2
    profile
    Does not support
    LBR mode

    *.wav

    wav

    wav

    -

    *.mid
    *.midi

    midi

    midi

    type 0 and type 1

    *.ape

    ape

    ape

    Does not support
    X13, NVT

    • Your product supports USB storage media, MP3
    players, digital cameras, and USB card readers.
    • The product does not support folder or file names
    longer than 128 characters.
    • Some USB/digital camera devices may not be
    compatible with the product.
    • Your product supports the FAT 16, FAT 32, and NTFS
    file systems.
    • Connect USB devices directly to the product’s USB
    port. Connecting through a USB cable may cause
    compatibility problems.
    • Inserting more than one memory device into a
    multi-card reader may cause the reader to operate
    improperly.
    • The product does not support the PTP protocol.
    • Do not disconnect a USB device during a “loading”
    process.
    • The bigger the image resolution, the longer the image
    takes to display.
    • This product cannot play MP3 files with DRM (Digital
    Rights Management) downloaded from commercial
    sites.
    • Your product only supports video that is under 30fps
    (frame rate).
    • Your product only supports USB Mass Storage Class
    (MSC) devices such as thumb drives and USB HDD.
    (HUB is not supported.)
    • Certain USB HDD Devices, multi-card readers and
    thumb drives may not be compatible with this product.
    • If some USB devices require excessive power, they
    may be limited by the circuit safety device.

    English

    9|

    Getting Started

    \ Some MKV and MP4 format discs may not play,

    02

    | NOTES |



  • Page 10

    Getting Started
    • If playback from a USB HDD is unstable, provide additional power by plugging the HDD into a wall socket. If the
    problem continues, contact the USB HDD manufacturer.
    • SAMSUNG is not responsible for any data file damage or data loss.

    AVCHD (Advanced Video Codec High Definition)
    • This product can play back AVCHD format discs. These discs are normally recorded and used in camcorders.
    • The AVCHD format is a high definition digital video camera format.
    • The MPEG-4 AVC/H.264 format compresses images with greater efficiency than the conventional image compressing
    format.
    • Some AVCHD discs use the “x.v.Colour” format. This product can play back AVCHD discs that use the “x.v.Colour”
    format.
    • “x.v.Colour” is a trademark of Sony Corporation.
    • “AVCHD” and the AVCHD logo are trademarks of Matsushita Electronic Industrial Co., Ltd. and Sony Corporation.
    | NOTES |

    \
    \
    \
    \

    Some AVCHD format discs may not play, depending on the recording conditions.
    AVCHD format discs need to be finalised.
    “x.v.Colour” offers a wider colour range than normal DVD camcorder discs.
    Some DivX, MKV and MP4 format discs may not play, depending on their video resolution and frame rate.

    Accessories
    Check for the supplied accessories below.

    BD
    RECEIVER

    TV

    FUNCTION
    TV/SOURCE

    2
    5
    8
    0

    1
    4
    7
    DISC
    MENU

    User Manual

    HDMI Cable

    ASC microphone

    3
    6
    9
    TITLE MENU
    POPUP

    MUTE

    VOL
    TV
    SOUND

    HOME

    S/W
    LEVEL

    TUNING
    / CH

    SLEEP

    TOOLS

    INFO

    RETURN

    EXIT
    TUNERMEMORY MO/ST

    A

    B

    C

    D

    SOUND
    3D
    SMART
    HUB SEARCH EFFECT SOUND

    FM Antenna

    | 10 English

    Power Cable

    Soft Cloth

    Remote Control/
    Batteries (AAA size)



  • Page 11

    Front Panel
    02

    VACUUM TUBE AMP

    PLAY/PAUSE

    OPEN/CLOSE

    FUNCTION

    POWER

    Getting Started

    D
    H-EN
    HIG

    STOP

    VACUUM TUBE SO
    UND

    DISC TRAY
    REMOTE CONTROL SENSOR

    DISPLAY

    USB

    5V
    0.5A

    VOLUME CONTROL
    | NOTES |

    \ Cellular phones or mobile devices placed near the vacuum tube amp or electronic products placed on the top of the
    product can cause audio noise or distortion.

    \ When the product is on, do not let children touch the product's surface. It will be hot.
    \ To upgrade the product's software through the USB jack, you must use a USB flash drive.
    \ When the product displays the Blu-ray Disc menu, you cannot start the movie by pressing the 6 button on the
    product or the remote. To play the movie, you must select Play Movie or Start in the disc menu, and then press the
    E button.
    \ If you use the Internet service or play the USB device contents on the TV, you cannot select the BD/DVD mode with
    the FUNCTION button. Stop the playing contents on the TV first to select the BD/DVD mode.

    Rear Panel
    * FM ANTENNA

    ASC IN

    AUX IN

    SPEAKER OUTPUT
    CONNECTORS

    LAN TERMINAL

    COOLING FAN

    FM ANT

    L

    POWER

    OPTICAL

    ASC IN

    HDMI OUT

    HDMI OUT

    1

    HDMI IN

    R

    2

    HDMI IN

    SPEAKERS OUT

    AUX IN

    LAN

    CENTER

    FRONT

    SUBWOOFER

    FRONT

    DIGITAL
    AUDIO IN

    L

    R

    FRONT TOP

    L

    FRONT TOP

    R

    IMPEDANCE : 3Ÿ

    EXTERNAL DIGITAL AUDIO IN (OPTICAL)

    POWER CORD

    * Connecting the FM Antenna
    1.

    Connect the FM antenna supplied to the FM ANT Jack.

    2.

    Slowly move the antenna wire around until you find a location where reception is good, then fasten it to a wall or
    other rigid surface.

    | NOTES |

    \ Maintain a minimum of 10 cm of clear space on all sides of the home cinema to ensure adequate ventilation. Do not
    obstruct the cooling fan or ventilation holes.

    \ This product does not receive AM broadcasts.
    English

    11 |



  • Page 12

    Getting Started
    Remote Control
    Tour of the Remote Control
    Turn the product on and off.
    Press to select the home cinema's
    mode (HDMI1, AUX, BD/DVD,
    etc.).
    or
    Press to select TV's video mode.

    BD
    RECEIVER
    FUNCTION
    TV/SOURCE

    Press to open and close the disc
    tray.
    Press numeric buttons to operate
    options.

    Press to view the disc menu.

    TV

    2
    5
    8
    0

    1
    4
    7
    DISC
    MENU

    3
    6
    9
    TITLE MENU
    POPUP

    Press to skip backwards or
    forwards.

    If you want to change to Home
    Cinema mode on the remote control,
    check this button's LED colour.
    - Home Cinema : Orange
    - TV : Green
    Turns the remote control light on or
    off. When on, the buttons become
    illuminated for a moment when
    pressed. (Using the remote control
    with this button set to ON will reduce
    the battery usage time.)

    Use to enter the Popup menu/Title
    menu.
    Press to search backwards or
    forwards.

    Press to stop/play a disc.

    Press to pause a disc.

    Cut off the sound temporarily.
    MUTE

    Adjust the volume.

    VOL
    TV
    SOUND

    Press to output the audio signal
    to the home cinema speakers or
    the TV Speaker. (See page 42)
    Use to adjust the level of the
    subwoofer.
    Press to use the Tools menu.

    TUNING
    / CH

    Press to move to the Home screen.
    HOME

    S/W
    LEVEL

    TOOLS

    SLEEP

    These buttons are used both for
    menus on the product and also
    several Blu-ray Disc functions.
    Press to use Smart Hub.

    Press to search contents.

    Set a Sleep time to shut off the
    product.

    INFO

    Use to display the playback
    information when playing
    a Blu-ray/DVD disc.

    Select on-screen menu items and
    change menu value.
    Return to the previous menu.

    Search for active FM stations and
    to change channels.

    EXIT

    RETURN

    TUNERMEMORY MO/ST

    A

    B

    C

    D

    SMART SEARCH SOUND
    3D
    HUB
    EFFECT SOUND

    Press to exit the menu.
    Select MONO or STEREO for radio
    broadcasts.
    Use to set a preset radio frequency.

    Press to apply the 3D sound effect.
    Press to apply sound effects.

    | 12 English



  • Page 13

    Installing batteries in the Remote Control

    Brand

    Code

    Mitsubishi/MGA

    18, 40, 59, 60, 75

    56, 57, 58

    MTC

    18

    A Mark

    01, 15

    NEC

    18, 19, 20, 40, 59, 60

    Anam

    01, 02, 03, 04, 05, 06, 07,
    08, 09, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14

    03
    03
    03
    06, 07, 08, 09, 54, 66,
    67, 73, 74
    18
    03, 15, 17, 18, 48, 54,
    59, 62, 69, 90
    15, 17, 18, 40, 48, 54,
    62, 72
    63, 66, 80, 91
    15, 18, 59
    40
    06, 66, 67
    17, 48, 56, 60, 61, 75
    18, 59, 67, 76, 77, 78,
    92, 93, 94
    03, 19
    40

    AOC

    01, 18, 40, 48

    Nikei
    Onking
    Onwa

    Bell & Howell
    (M.Wards)

    57, 58, 81

    Panasonic

    Brocsonic

    59, 60

    Penney

    | NOTES |

    Candle

    18

    \ Make sure to match the “+” and “–” ends of the

    Cetronic

    03

    batteries with the diagram inside the compartment.

    Citizen

    03, 18, 25

    \ Assuming typical TV usage, the batteries last for about

    Cinema

    97

    one year.

    \ The remote control can be used up to approximately 7
    meters from the product in a straight line.

    Setting up the Remote Control
    You can control certain functions of your TV with this
    remote control.
    To operate a TV with the Remote Control
    1.

    Press the TV button to set the remote control to TV
    mode.

    2.

    Turn on your TV.

    3.

    While holding down the POWER button, enter the
    code corresponding to your brand of TV.
    • If there is more than one code listed for your TV in
    the table, enter one at a time to determine which
    code works.
    • Example : For a Samsung TV
    While holding down the POWER button, use
    the number buttons to enter 00. If that does not
    work, try 15, then 16, etc.

    4.

    If the TV turns off, the setting is complete.
    • You can use the TV POWER, VOLUME,
    CHANNEL, and Numeric buttons (0~9).

    | NOTES |

    Classic

    03

    Concerto

    18

    Contec

    46

    Coronado

    15

    Craig

    03, 05, 61, 82, 83, 84

    Croslex

    62

    Crown

    03

    Curtis Mates

    59, 61, 63

    CXC

    03

    Daewoo

    02, 03, 04, 15, 16, 17, 18,
    19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25,
    26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 32, 34,
    35, 36, 48, 59, 90

    Daytron

    40

    Dynasty

    03

    Emerson

    03, 15, 40, 46, 59, 61, 64,
    82, 83, 84, 85

    Fisher

    19, 65

    Funai

    03

    Futuretech

    03

    General Electric 06, 40, 56, 59, 66, 67, 68
    (GE)
    Hall Mark

    40

    Hitachi

    15, 18, 50, 59, 69

    Inkel

    45

    JC Penny

    56, 59, 67, 86

    \ The remote may not be able to control some

    JVC

    70

    functions, depending on your brand of TV. Also, the
    remote control may not work on some brands of TVs.
    \ The remote control will work with Samsung TVs by
    default.

    KTV

    59, 61, 87, 88

    KEC

    03, 15, 40

    KMC

    15

    LG (Goldstar)

    01, 15, 16, 17, 37, 38, 39,
    40, 41, 42, 43, 44

    Philco
    Philips
    Pioneer
    Portland
    Proton
    Quasar
    Radio Shack
    RCA/Proscan
    Realistic
    Sampo
    Samsung

    00, 15, 16, 17, 40, 43,
    46, 47, 48, 49,
    59, 60, 98

    Sanyo
    Scott
    Sears
    Sharp
    Signature 2000
    (M.Wards)

    19, 61, 65
    03, 40, 60, 61
    15, 18, 19
    15, 57, 64

    Sony

    50, 51, 52, 53, 55

    Soundesign

    03, 40

    57, 58

    Spectricon

    01

    SSS

    18

    Sylvania
    Symphonic
    Tatung
    Techwood
    Teknika
    TMK
    Toshiba
    Vidtech

    18, 40, 48, 54, 59, 60,
    62
    61, 95, 96
    06
    18
    03, 15, 18, 25
    18, 40
    19, 57, 63, 71
    18

    Videch

    59, 60, 69

    Luxman

    18

    Wards

    15, 17, 18, 40, 48, 54,
    60, 64

    LXI (Sears)

    19, 54, 56, 59, 60, 62, 63,
    65, 71

    Yamaha

    18

    York

    40

    Magnavox

    15, 17, 18, 48, 54, 59, 60,
    62, 72, 89

    Yupiteru

    03

    Marantz

    40, 54

    Zenith

    58, 79

    Matsui

    54

    Zonda

    01

    MGA

    18, 40

    Dongyang

    03, 54

    English

    13 |

    Getting Started

    2

    Code

    Admiral
    (M.Wards)

    02

    Brand

    Battery size: AAA

    1

    TV Control Codes



  • Page 14

    Connections
    This section describes various methods of connecting the product to other external components.
    Before moving or installing the product, be sure to turn off the power and disconnect the power cord.

    Connecting the Speakers
    Position of the product
    Place it on a stand or cabinet shelf, or
    Centre

    Subwoofer

    under the TV stand.

    Front/
    Front Top (R)

    Selecting the Listening Position
    The listening position should be located
    about 2.5 to 3 times the distance of the

    Surround (R)

    Product

    TV's screen size away from the TV.
    For example, if you have a 46 inch

    Front/
    Front Top (L)

    screen, locate the listening position 2.92
    to 3.50 meters from the screen.

    Surround (L)

    Wireless
    Receiver Module

    Front/Front Top
    Speakers

    Place these speakers in front of your listening position, facing inwards (about 45°) toward you.
    Place the front speakers so that their tweeters will be at the same height as your ear. Align
    the front face of the front/front top speakers with the front face of the centre speaker or place
    them slightly in front of the centre speakers.

    Centre Speaker

    It is best to install the Centre Speaker at the same height as the front/front top speakers. You
    can also install it directly over or under the TV.

    Surround
    Speakers

    Subwoofer

    Place these speakers to the side of your listening position. If there isn't enough room, place
    these speakers so they face each other. Position them about 60 to 90cm above your ear,
    facing slightly downward.
    * Unlike the front/front top and centre speakers, the surround speakers are used mainly for
    sound effects. Sound will not come from them all the time.
    The position of the subwoofer is not so critical. Place it anywhere you like.

    * Surround speakers must be connected to the wireless receiver module.

    Speaker Components
    SWA-6000
    Screw (5x20) x 16

    Speaker Cable x 2

    Centre

    Front/Front Top x 2 Surround x 2

    | 14 English

    Stand x 4

    Stand Base x 4

    Subwoofer

    Wireless Receiver
    Module



  • Page 15

    Installing the Speakers on the Tallboy Stand
    1.

    1

    Stand Base

    2

    Connections

    Turn the Stand Base upside-down and connect it to the
    Stand.

    Stand

    3.

    Use the driver to combine the screws on the 3 marked
    holes.

    4.

    Connect the upper Speaker to the assembled Stand.

    3

    4
    Speaker

    Stand

    5.

    Insert a screw clockwise into the hole on the rear of the
    speaker using a screwdriver.

    6.

    This is the appearance after the speaker is installed. Follow
    these steps to install other speaker.

    5

    6
    or

    Connecting The Speakers
    1.

    Match each speaker cable bundle to the correct speaker by matching the colour coded
    plug on each bundle to the coloured sticker on the bottom of each speaker.

    2.

    To attach speaker wire to each speaker:
    a. Press down the red tab on the back of the speaker, insert the red wire, and then
    release the tab.
    b. Press down the black tab on the back of the speaker, insert the black wire, and then
    release the tab.

    3.
    4.
    5.
    6.

    03

    2.

    Straighten the speaker cable and put it into the hole on the
    Stand Base.

    Black

    Red

    Connect the speaker wire plugs from each speaker to the back of the product by
    matching the colours of the speaker plugs to the colours of the speaker jacks.
    Connect the left and right surround speakers to the wireless receiver module.
    Again, match the colour of the plugs to the jacks on the wireless receiver module.
    Plug the power cord of the wireless receiver module into a wall outlet.
    Turn on the product. The product and wireless receiver module will now communicate with each other and you will
    hear sound from the Surround speakers.

    English

    15 |



  • Page 16

    Connections
    Centre Speaker

    Front/Front Top
    Speaker (L)

    Surround
    Speaker (L)

    SPEAKERS OUT

    Subwoofer

    Surround
    Speaker (R)

    CENTER

    FRONT

    SUBWOOFER

    FRONT

    L

    R

    FRONT TOP

    L

    FRONT TOP

    R

    IMPEDANCE : 3Ÿ

    Front/Front Top
    Speaker (R)

    L
    ASC IN

    N

    SPEAKERS OUT

    T

    CENTER

    FRONT

    SUBWOOFER

    FRONT

    L

    R

    FRONT TOP

    L

    FRONT TOP

    R

    IMPEDANCE : 3Ÿ

    Wireless Receiver Module
    * This product should be connected with the SWA-6000 only.
    | CAUTION |

    \ If you want to install the product on the wall, fasten the screws or nails on the wall firmly and use the holes on the
    \
    \
    \
    \
    \
    \
    \
    \

    rear of speaker to install. However, when you install it, accessories (nails or screws) and installation is not provided by
    the company.
    Do not let children play with or near the speakers. They could get hurt if a speaker falls.
    When connecting the speaker wires to the speakers, make sure that the polarity (+/–) is correct.
    Keep the subwoofer speaker out of reach of children to prevent children from inserting their hands or alien
    substances into the duct (hole) of the subwoofer speaker.
    Do not hang the subwoofer on the wall using the duct (hole).
    The wireless receiving antenna is built into the wireless receiver module. Keep it away from water and moisture.
    For optimal listening performance, make sure that the area around the wireless receiver module location is clear of
    any obstructions.
    If you hear no sound from the wireless surround speakers, switch the mode to Dolby Pro Logic II.
    In 2-CH mode, you will hear no sound from the wireless surround speakers.

    | NOTES |

    \ If you place a speaker near your TV set, the screen colour may be distorted because of the magnetic field.
    \ Place the wireless receiver module at the rear of the listening position. If the wireless receiver module is too close to
    the product, sound from the speakers may be disrupted because of interference.

    \ If you use a device such as a microwave oven, wireless LAN Card, Bluetooth equipment or any other device that uses
    the 2.4/5.8GHz frequencies near the product, sound from the speakers may be disrupted because of interference.

    \ The maximum transmission distance from the product to the wireless receiver module is about 10m, but may vary
    depending on your operating environment. If a steel-concrete wall or metallic wall is between the product and the
    wireless receiver module, the system may not operate at all, because the radio wave cannot penetrate metal.
    \ If the product doesn't make a wireless connection, you need to run an ID Set between the product and wireless
    receiver module. With the product turned off, press "0""1""3""5" on the remote control. Turn on the wireless
    receiver module. Then, press and hold the “ID SET” button on the back of the wireless receiver module for 5
    seconds, and then turn the product on.

    | 16 English



  • Page 17

    Connecting to TV/External Devices
    03

    FM ANT

    ASC IN

    1

    HDMI OUT

    HDMI IN

    2

    R

    DIGITAL
    AUDIO IN

    CENTER

    FRONT

    SUBWOOFER

    FRONT

    L

    R

    FRONT TOP

    L

    FRONT TOP

    R

    LAN

    IMPEDANCE : 3Ÿ

    L

    R

    W

    FM ANT

    POWER

    OPTICAL

    SPEAKERS OUT

    L

    Connections

    AUX IN
    AUX IN

    LAN

    1

    HDMI OUT

    Red

    HDMI IN

    R

    2

    OPTICAL

    DIGITAL
    AUDIO IN

    White
    Method 1

    HDMI IN

    External
    Devices

    Method 2

    HDMI OUT

    Method 3

    AUDIO OUT

    OPTICAL OUT

    Connecting to a TV
    Connect an HDMI cable from the HDMI OUT jack on the back of the product to the HDMI IN jack on your TV. If you have
    set the product's remote control to operate your TV, press the TV SOURCE button on the remote control and select
    HDMI as the external source of the TV.

    Connecting to External Devices
    To select the correct mode for an external device, press the FUNCTION button. Each time you press the button, the
    mode changes in this order : BD/DVD D. IN AUX HDMI1 HDMI2 FM BT

    Method 1 HDMI IN : Connecting to an External Component with a HDMI Cable
    Connect an HDMI cable from the HDMI IN jack on the back of the product to the HDMI OUT jack on your digital device.
     Select the HDMI1 or HDMI2 mode.

    Method 2 AUX IN : Connecting an External Analogue Component
    Using a RCA audio cable (not supplied), connect the AUDIO In jack on the product to the AUDIO Out jack on the
    external analogue component.  Select the AUX mode.
    • Be sure to match the colours on the cable plugs to the colours on the input and output jacks.

    Method 3 OPTICAL : Connecting an External Digital Audio Component
    To connect the digital audio output of digital signal components such as Cable Boxes and Satellite Receivers (Set-TopBoxes). Using a digital optical cable (not supplied), connect the Optical Digital Audio In jack on the product to the Digital
    Optical Out jack of the external digital device.
     Select the D. IN mode.
    | NOTES |

    \ To see video from your Cable Box/Satellite receiver, you must connect its video output directly to your TV.
    \ This system supports Digital sampling frequencies of 32 kHz or higher from external digital components.
    \ This system supports only DTS and Dolby Digital audio. MPEG audio, a bitstream format, is not supported

    English

    17 |



  • Page 18

    Connections
    Connecting to a Network Router

    Wireless Network

    You can connect your product to your network router
    using one of the methods illustrated below.

    Wired Network

    L

    FM ANT

    POWER

    OPTICAL
    ASC IN

    1

    HDMI IN

    2

    R

    DIGITAL
    AUDIO IN

    SPEAKERS OUT

    AUX IN

    LAN

    HDMI OUT

    CENTER

    FRONT

    SUBWOOFER

    FRONT

    L

    R

    FRONT TOP

    L

    FRONT TOP

    R

    IMPEDANCE : 3Ÿ

    Wireless IP sharer
    Broadband modem
    (with integrated router)
    Broadband
    service

    Broadband
    service

    Or

    Router

    | NOTES |

    \ If your wireless IP router supports DHCP, this product
    Broadband
    service
    Broadband
    modem

    can use a DHCP or static IP address to connect to the
    wireless network.
    \ Set your wireless IP router to Infrastructure mode. Adhoc mode is not supported.
    \ The product supports only the following wireless
    security key protocols:
    - WEP (OPEN/SHARED), WPA-PSK (TKIP/AES),
    WPA2-PSK (TKIP/AES)

    \ Select a channel on the wireless IP router that is not
    | NOTES |

    \ Your router or your Internet Service Provider's policies
    may prevent the product from accessing Samsung's
    software update server. If this occurs, contact your
    Internet Service Provider (ISP) for more information.
    \ DSL users, please use a router to make a network
    connection.
    \ To use the AllShare function, you must connect your
    PC to your network as shown in the illustrations on the
    above.
    The connection can be wired or wireless.

    | 18 English

    currently being used. If the channel set for the wireless
    IP router is currently being used by another device
    nearby, it will result in interference and communication
    failure.
    \ In compliance with the newest Wi-Fi certification
    specifications, Samsung home cinema do not support
    WEP, TKIP, or TKIP-AES (WPS2 Mixed) security
    encryption in networks running in the 802.11n mode.
    \ Wireless LAN, by its nature, may cause interference,
    depending on the operating conditions (AP
    performance, distance, obstacles, interference by
    other radio devices, etc).



  • Page 19

    Settings
    The Initial Settings Procedure

    | NOTES |

    \ If you want to display the Initial Settings screen again
    and make changes, select Settings > System >
    Setup in the Home screen or select the Reset option.
    (See page 22)

    4

    Settings : Set various functions to suit your
    personal preferences.

    5

    Recommended Apps : A list of useful and
    popular apps we recommend you download.

    6

    Web Browser : You can access the Internet
    using the Web Browser application.

    7

    RED (A) : Press the RED (A) button on your
    remote to create and/or log in to your personal
    Samsung account.
    BLUE (D) : Set up the wireless mirroring
    function between the home cinema and a smart
    phone or tablet.

     Selecting an Option on the Home Screen
    1.

    The Home Screen

    To select an option on the Home screen, move the
    cursor using the ▲▼◄► buttons until it highlights
    the option of your choice, and then press the E
    button.

    | NOTES |

    1

    Movies & TV
    Shows

    2

    3

    Apps

    4

    \ If you leave the product in the stop mode for more
    than 5 minutes without using it, a screen saver will
    appear on your TV. If the product is left in the screen
    saver mode for more than 20 minutes, the power will
    automatically turn off.

    Photos,
    Videos &
    Music

    Accessing the Settings Screen
    1.

    Select Settings on the Home screen, and then
    press E.
    E The Settings screen appears.
    Settings

    Add App

    Add App

    Add App

    Web Browser

    Settings

    Display
    Display

    a Samsung Account d Screen Mirroring

    4K Output
    Audio

    5 6

    7

    TV Aspect Ratio

    Smart Features

    BD Wise

    System
    Support

    Movies & TV Shows : Download movies and
    TV Shows from the Internet.
    1

    Auto

    3D Settings

    Network

    16:9 Original
    Off

    Resolution

    Auto

    Movie Frame (24Fs)

    Auto

    DVD 24fps Conversion

    Off

    | NOTES |

    \ Depending on your country, this menu
    function may not be supported.
    2

    Apps : Access various for pay or free-of-charge
    applications.

    2.

    To access the menus, sub-menus, and options
    on the Settings screen, please refer to the remote
    control illustration on the next page.

    English

    19 |

    Settings

    The Initial Settings Procedure lets you set the OSD and
    menu languages, configure the connection to your home
    network, choose the aspect ratio output (screen size and
    format) that is correct for your TV, and apply an upgrade
    to your product's software, if one is available.
    For complete Initial Settings instructions, follow the order
    in the screen.

    Photos, Videos & Music : Play photos, videos
    or music content from Disc, USB, PC or mobile
    devices.

    04

    • The Home menu will not appear if you do not
    configure the initial settings.
    • The OSD (On Screen Display) may change in this
    product after you upgrade the software version.
    • The access steps may differ depending on the
    menu you selected.

    3



  • Page 20

    Settings
    Buttons on the Remote Control Used
    for the Settings Menu
    HOME

    S/W
    LEVEL

    1

    TOOLS

    3D Settings

    Set up the 3D related functions.
     3D Blu-ray Playback Mode:
    Select whether to play a Blu-ray
    Disc with 3D contents in 3D Mode.
    If you move to the Home or Smart
    Hub Home menu while in 3D
    mode, the product will switch to 2D
    automatically.
     Screen Size: Enter the size of the
    TV attached to the product. The
    product will automatically adjust the
    3D output to the screen size of the
    TV.

    TV Aspect
    Ratio

    Lets you adjust the output of the
    product to the screen size of your
    TV. See page 52.

    SLEEP

    INFO

    3
    2

    EXIT

    RETURN

    4

    TUNERMEMORY MO/ST

    A

    B

    C

    D

    1

    HOME Button : Press to move to the Home
    screen.

    2

    RETURN Button : Return to the previous menu.

    3

    E (Enter) / DIRECTION Button :
    • Press ▲▼◄► to move the cursor or select
    an item.
    • Press the E button to activate the currently
    selected item or confirm a setting.

    4

    EXIT Button : Press to exit the current menu.

    BD Wise

    BD Wise is Samsung’s latest interconnectivity feature.
    When you connect a Samsung
    product and a Samsung TV with BD
    Wise to each other via HDMI, and
    BD Wise is on in both the product
    and TV, the product outputs video at
    the video resolution and frame rate
    of the Blu-ray/DVD Disc.

    Resolution

    Lets you set the output resolution of
    the HDMI video signal to
    BD Wise, Auto, 1080p, 1080i,
    720p, 576p/480p. The number
    indicates the number of lines of
    video per frame. The i and p indicate
    interlaced and progressive scan,
    respectively. The more lines, the
    higher quality.

    Movie Frame
    (24Fs)

    Setting the Movie Frame (24Fs)
    feature to Auto lets the product
    adjust its HDMI output to 24 frames
    per second automatically for
    improved picture quality if attached
    to a 24Fs compatible TV.
    • You can enjoy the Movie Frame
    (24Fs) feature only on a TV
    supporting this frame rate.
    • Movie Frame is only available
    when the product is in the HDMI
    1080p output resolution modes.

    Detailed Function Information
    Each Settings function, menu item, and individual option
    is explained in detail on-screen. To view an explanation,
    use the ▲▼◄► buttons to select the function, menu
    item, or option. The explanation will usually appear on the
    right of the screen.
    A short description of each Settings function starts on
    this page. Additional information on some of the functions
    is also in the Appendix of this manual.

    Settings Menu Functions
    Display
    This option outputs HDMI video at
    4K resolution. This is only available
    when Movie Frame is set to Auto.
    | NOTES |
    4K Output

    \ To use this feature, you must
    connect the product to a device
    that supports 4K resolution and
    you must have content that plays
    at 24Fs (film speed).

    | 20 English



  • Page 21

    Smart Hub
    Screen Size

    Lets you select the optimal size for
    the Smart Hub Screen.

    HDMI Colour
    Format

    Lets you set the colour space format
    for the HDMI output to match the
    capabilities of the connected device
    (TV, monitor, etc).

    HDMI Deep
    Colour

    Lets you set the product to output
    video from the HDMI OUT jack with
    Deep Colour. Deep Colour provides
    more accurate colour reproduction
    with greater colour depth.

    Progressive
    Mode

    Lets you improve picture quality
    when viewing DVDs.
    Audio

    Speaker
    Settings

    Lets you adjust the following
    speaker settings and turn the test
    tone on and off so you can test the
    speakers.
     Level: Lets you adjust the relative
    loudness of each speaker from 6db
    to -6db. For example, if you like
    deep bass, you can increase the
    loudness of the subwoofer by 6db.
     Distance: Lets you adjust the
    relative distance of each speaker
    from the listening position up to 9
    meters. The farther the distance,
    the louder the speaker will be.
     Test Tone: Lets you run the Test
    Tone function so you can test your
    adjustments. Setting Test Tone to
    On turns the Test Tone on. Setting it
    to Off turns it off.

    Auto Sound
    Calibration

    The product automatically recognize
    the sound field optimized for your
    environment.

    Equaliser

    Smart Volume

    Lets you configure the Equaliser
    settings manually.

    Speaker
    Selection

    Lets you select which speakers you
    want active, either the TV's speakers
    or the home cinema's speakers.

    Audio Return
    Channel

    Lets you direct the sound from the
    TV to the Home Cinema speakers.
    Requires a HDMI connection and
    an Audio Return Channel (ARC)
    compatible TV.
    • If Audio Return Channel is set to
    on and you are using an HDMI
    cable to connect the product to
    the TV, digital optical input will not
    work.
    • If Audio Return Channel is set to
    auto and you are using an HDMI
    Cable to connect the product to
    the TV, ARC or digital optical input
    is selected automatically.

    Digital Output

    Lets you set the Digital Output to
    match the capabilities of the AV
    receiver you’ve connected to the
    product. For more details, please
    refer to the digital output selection
    table. (See page 54)

    Dynamic
    Range
    Control

    Lets you apply dynamic range
    control to Dolby Digital, Dolby
    Digital Plus, and Dolby TrueHD
    audio.
     Auto: Automatically controls the
    dynamic range of Dolby TrueHD
    audio, based on information in the
    Dolby TrueHD soundtrack. Also
    turns dynamic range control off for
    Dolby Digital and Dolby Digital Plus.
     Off: Leaves the dynamic range
    uncompressed, letting you hear the
    original sound.
     On: Turns dynamic range control on
    for all three Dolby formats. Quieter
    sounds are made louder and the
    volume of loud sounds is reduced.

    Downmixing
    Mode

    Lets you select the multi-channel
    downmix method that is compatible
    with your stereo system. You
    can choose to have the product
    downmix to normal stereo or in
    surround compatible stereo.

    Lets you set the product so that
    the volume remains stable when a
    scene change occurs or when you
    change the channel.

    English

    21 |

    Settings

    Converts DVD playback to 24
    frames per second and outputs it via
    HDMI. This option is only available
    when Movie Frame (24Fs) is set to
    on.

    04

    DVD 24fps
    Conversion



  • Page 22

    Settings
    Audio Sync

    When the product is attached to a
    digital TV, lets you adjust the audio
    delay so that the audio syncs with
    the video. You can set the delay
    between 0 and 300 milliseconds.

    Smart Features

    Apps Settings
    Network
    Network
    Status

    Lets you check the current network
    and Internet status.

    Network
    Settings

    Configure the network connection
    so you can enjoy various features
    such as Internet services or AllShare
    Wi-Fi functionality, and perform
    software upgrades.

    Wi-Fi Direct

    Lets you connect a Wi-Fi Direct
    device to the product using a peerto-pear network, without the need
    for a wireless router.
    Note that if the product is connected
    to a wireless network, it may be
    disconnected when you use Wi-Fi
    Direct.
    | NOTES |

    \ Text files, such as files with a .TXT
    or .DOC extension, will not display
    when you are using the Wi-Fi
    Direct function.
    AllShare
    Settings

    Lets you control which devices on
    your network, such as smart phones
    and tablets, can share content with
    your TV.

    Device Name

    Lets you assign an identifying name
    to the product. You use this name
    to identify the product when you are
    connecting external Wi-Fi devices
    (smart phones, tablets, etc.) to it.

    BD-Live
    Settings

    Set various BD-Live functions.
    BD-Live allows you to access extra
    features available on some Blu-ray
    Discs if you are connected to the
    Internet.
     BD-Live Internet Connection :
    Lets you fully allow, partly allow,
    or prohibit a BD-Live Internet
    connection.
     BD Data Management : Manage
    BD data downloaded from a BDLive service or Blu-ray Disc.

    | 22 English

    Lets you configure App notification
    settings and view basic info about
    your Apps.
     Push Notification Settings :
    Receive notifications from selected
    services.
     Properties : See basic info about
    Apps.
    You can lock access to Video on
    Demand (VOD) content based on its
    rating.

    VOD Rating
    Lock

    | NOTES |

    \ The default security PIN is 0000.
    \ Depending on your country,
    this menu function may not be
    supported.

    Terms &
    Conditions,
    Privacy Policy

    Reset Smart
    Hub

    Lets you view the Smart Hub Terms
    and Conditions and Privacy Policy.
    Resets all Smart Hub settings to
    their default settings.
    | NOTES |

    \ The default security PIN is 0000.
    System
    Setup

    Lets you re-run the Initial Settings
    procedure.

    Language

    You can select the language you
    prefer for the On-Screen menu, disc
    menu, subtitles, etc.
    • The language you select for the
    disc menu, disc audio, or subtitles
    will only appear if it is supported
    on the disc.

    Device
    Manager

    You can connect a wireless USB
    keyboard or mouse to the USB port
    on the front of the product.
     Keyboard Settings: Lets you
    configure a wireless USB keyboard
    connected to the product.



  • Page 23

    \ You can use the keyboard only

    1.

    Connect the USB mouse to
    the product.

    2.

    Click the primary button you
    selected in Mouse Settings.
    The Simple Menu appears.

    3.

    \
    \
    \
    \
    \

    Security

    2.

    Press and hold the 5 button
    on the front panel for 5
    seconds or more.
    All settings will revert to the
    factory default settings.

    \ When the factory default settings
    are restored, all the user stored
    BD data is deleted.

    General

    Some USB HID keyboards and
    mice may not be compatible with
    your product.
    Some HID keyboard keys may
    not work.
    Wired USB keyboards are not
    supported.
    Some applications may not be
    supported.
    If a wireless HID Keyboard does not
    operate because of interference,
    move the keyboard closer to the
    product.

    The default security PIN is 0000.
    Enter the default PIN to access
    the security function if you haven't
    created your own PIN.
     BD Parental Rating: Restrict
    playback of Blu-ray discs with
    specific ratings unless the PIN is
    entered.
     DVD Parental Rating: Prevents
    playback of DVDs with a rating
    above a specific numerical rating
    you have set unless the PIN is
    entered.

    Remove any disc or USB
    storage device.

    | NOTES |

    Click the menu options you
    want.

    | NOTES |

    1.

    Anynet+
    (HDMI-CEC)

    You can specify the display
    brightness and time zone.
     Front Display: Lets you change the
    brightness of the front panel.
     Time Zone: You can specify the
    time zone that is applicable to your
    area.
     Menu Transparency: Adjust the
    transparency of the menu box.
    Anynet+ is a convenient function
    that offers linked operations with
    other Samsung products that have
    the Anynet+ feature and lets you
    control those products with one
    Samsung TV remote. To operate
    this function, you must connect this
    product to an Anynet+ Samsung TV
    using an HDMI cable.
    If you want to use an Anynet+
    (HDMI-CEC) function, please follow
    the instructions below.

    1) Connect the product to an
    Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC)-compliant
    Samsung TV using HDMI Cable.

    2) Set the Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC)
    feature to On in both the TV and
    the product.

    3) Search for and then select the
    product in the TV's Anynet+
    (HDMI-CEC) list. For more exact
    instructions, see the Anynet+
    section of the TV's user's
    manual.

    English

    23 |

    Settings

    when a QWERTY keyboard
    screen or window appears in the
    Web Browser.
     Mouse Settings: Lets you
    configure a wireless USB mouse
    connected to the product. You can
    use the mouse in the product's
    menu in the same way you use a
    mouse on your PC.
     To use a mouse with the
    product's menu:

    04

     Change PIN: Change the 4-digit
    PIN used to access security
    functions.
     If you forget your PIN

    | NOTES |



  • Page 24

    Settings
    View DivX® VOD Registration
    Codes to purchase and play DivX®
    VOD contents.
    Support

    Remote
    Management

    Software
    Update

    Usage Mode

    Contact
    Samsung

    Reset

    When activated, lets Samsung
    Call Centre agents diagnose and
    fix problems with the product
    remotely. Requires an active Internet
    connection. Remote Management
    service might not be available in
    some countries.

    Auto Sound Calibration
    By setting the Auto Sound Calibration (ASC) function just
    once when you relocate or install the product, you can
    have the product automatically recognize the distance
    between speakers, levels between channels, and
    frequency characteristics to create a 7.1-channel sound
    field optimized for your environment.
    AUX IN

    FM ANT

    LAN
    L

    OPTICAL
    ASC IN

    R

    DIGITAL
    AUDIO IN

    SPEAKERS OUT

    DivX® Video
    On Demand

    CENTER

    FRONT

    SUBWOOFER

    FRONT

    L

    R

    FRON

    FRON

    IMPEDANCE : 3Ÿ

    For more information about the
    Software Update function, see
    "Upgrading Software" on page 28.
    Lets you set the Use mode. If you
    are using the home cinema at home,
    always select Home. Store is for
    retail display settings only.

    ASC microphone

    Provides contact information for
    assistance with your product.
    Reverts all settings to their defaults
    except for the network and Smart
    Hub settings, and then starts the
    Setup function. Requires that you
    enter your security PIN. The default
    security PIN is 0000

    Auto Sound Calibration
    Select whether to run and apply automatic sound
    calibration.
    • Off: Produces sound according to the speaker
    configuration specified in speaker settings.
    • On: Runs Auto Sound Calibration and produces sound
    according to the calibrated speaker settings.

    Measurement
    Before running the calibration, make sure no disc is left in
    the disc tray.

    | 24 English

    1.

    Plug the ASC microphone into the ASC IN jack.

    2.

    Place the ASC microphone at the listening position.
    • Auto Sound Calibration automatically sets up
    speakers in the following sequence : Front L 
    Centre  Front R  Surround R  Front Top
    R  Front Top L  Surround L  Subwoofer
    • Press the RETURN button to cancel the Auto
    Sound Calibration Setting.



  • Page 25

    Networks and the Internet

    In the Network Settings screen, change Network
    type to Wired. Then, select Connect and press the
    E button.
    The product searches for a network, and then
    displays the connection failed message.

    Configuring your Network Connection

    | NOTES |

    If you didn't configure your network connection during
    the initial settings procedure or you need to reset the
    network connection, follow the directions below.
    Before you begin, contact your Internet Service Provider
    to find out if your IP address is static or dynamic. If it
    is dynamic, and you have a wired or wireless network,
    we recommend using the Automatic configuration
    procedures described below.
    If you are connecting to a wired network, connect the
    product to your router using a LAN cable before you start
    the configuration procedure.
    To begin configuring your network connection, follow
    these steps:

    \ If it is possible to connect the home cinema to your

    1.

    network wirelessly, select Change Network at this
    point, change the Network type to Wireless, and
    then go to the instructions for wireless networks on
    page 26.

    Network Settings
    Wired network connection failed.
    MAC Address
    IP Address
    Subnet Mask
    Gateway
    DNS Server

    Unable to connect to the network. Try the following: check if your IP address is
    set correctly in IP Settings. Contact your Internet service provider for more
    information.

    In the Home screen, select Settings, and then
    press the E button.

    2.

    Select Network, and then press the E button.

    3.

    Select Network Settings, and then press the E
    button.

    4.

    Go to the instructions for Wired networks starting
    below or the instructions for Wireless networks
    starting on page 26.

    Change Network

    When it is done, highlight OK, and then press E
    button.

    Close

    3.

    Select the IP setting field, and then set it to Enter
    manually.

    4.

    Select a value to enter (IP Address, for example),
    and then press E. Use the number keypad on
    your remote control to enter the numbers for the
    value. You can also enter numbers using the ▲▼
    buttons. Use the ◄► buttons on the remote control
    to move from entry field to entry field within a value.
    When done with one value, press the E button.

    5.

    Press the ▲ or ▼ button to move to another value,
    and then enter the numbers for that value following
    the instructions in Step 4.

    6.

    Repeat Steps 4 and 5 until you have filled in all
    values.

    After following Steps 1 to 3 above:

    2.

    Retry

    Use the ◄► buttons to select IP Settings, and
    then press the E button. The IP Settings screen
    appears.

    ❑ Wired – Automatic

    In the Network Settings screen, change Network
    type to Wired. Then, select Connect and press
    the E button. The product detects the wired
    connection, verifies the network connection and
    then connects to the network.

    IP Settings

    2.

    Wired Network

    1.

    XX:XX:XX:XX:XX:XX
    0. 0. 0. 0
    0. 0. 0. 0
    0. 0. 0. 0
    0. 0. 0. 0

    English

    25 |

    Settings

    1.

    04

    When you connect this product to a network, you can
    use network based applications and functions such as
    Smart Hub and BD-LIVE, and upgrade the product's
    software through the network connection. For more
    information about accessing and using Internet services,
    see the Network Services chapter of this manual on
    pages 43~51. Instructions for configuring the network
    connection start below.

    ❑ Wired - Manual

    If you have a static IP address or the automatic procedure
    does not work, you'll need to set the Network Settings
    values manually.
    After following Steps 1 to 3 above:



  • Page 26

    Settings
    | NOTES |

    4.

    \ You can get the Network values from your Internet
    provider.
    7.

    When finished entering all the values, select OK,
    and then press the E button. The home cinema
    verifies the network connection and then connects
    to the network.

    | NOTES |

    \ You should be able to find the security code or pass
    phrase on one of the set up screens you used to set
    up your router or modem.
    ❑ Wireless - Manual

    Wireless Network
    You can setup a wireless network connection in three
    ways:
    - Wireless Automatic
    - Wireless Manual
    - WPS(PBC)
    Before you configure the wireless network connection,
    disconnect any wireless network device currently
    connected to the product or, if applicable, the product's
    current wired connection.
    ❑ Wireless - Automatic

    After following Steps 1 to 3 in "Configuring Your Network
    Connection" on page 25:
    1.

    If you have a static IP address or the Automatic
    procedure does not work, you'll need to set the Network
    Settings values manually.
    After following Steps 1 to 3 in "Configuring Your Network
    Connection" on page 25:
    1.

    In the Network Settings screen, change Network
    type to Wireless. The product searches for and
    then displays a list of the available networks.

    2.

    Scroll through the list, select the desired network or
    Add Network, and then press the E button.

    3.

    If you selected a network in Step 2, go to Step 6.
    If you selected Add Network, go to Step 4.

    4.

    Enter your wireless network or wireless router's
    name.
    • Enter numbers directly using the number buttons
    on your remote control.
    • Enter letters by selecting a letter with the ▲▼◄►
    buttons, and then pressing the E button.
    • To display capital letters (or redisplay small letters
    , and
    if capital letters are displayed), select
    then press the E button.
    • To display symbols and punctuation, select
    123#&, and then press the E button. To
    redisplay letters, select 123#&, and then press
    the E button.
    When finished, select Done, and then press the E
    button.

    5.

    On the Security type screen that appears, use the
    ▲▼ buttons to select the network's Security type,
    and then press the E button. On the next screen,
    enter your network's security code or pass phrase.
    • Enter numbers directly using the number buttons
    on your remote control.
    • Enter letters by selecting a letter with the ▲▼◄►
    buttons, and then pressing the E button.
    When finished, select Done, and then press the E
    button. The product searches for the network.

    In the Network Settings screen, change Network
    type to Wireless. The product searches for and
    then displays a list of the available networks.

    Network Settings
    Select your network type.
    Network type

    Wireless

    Wireless network
    si-ap
    iptime
    iptime5G

    You can connect your Blu-ray
    player to the internet. Please
    select which wireless network to
    use.

    KIMING_VTOWER
    TIAS
    Refresh

    WPS(PBC)

    2.

    Select the desired network, and then press the E
    button.

    3.

    On the Security screen, enter your network's
    security code or pass phrase.
    Enter numbers directly using the number buttons
    on your remote control. Enter letters by selecting a
    letter with ▲▼◄► buttons, and then pressing E
    button.

    | 26 English

    When finished, select Done, and then press the E
    button. The product verifies the network connection
    and then connects to the network.



  • Page 27

    1.

    In the Network Settings screen, change Network
    type to Wireless. The product searches for and
    then displays a list of the available networks.

    7.

    Select the IP setting field, and then set it to Enter
    manually.

    2.

    Scroll the list down, select WPS(PBC), and then
    press the E button.

    8.

    Select a network value to enter (IP Address, for
    example), and then press E button. Use the
    number keypad on your remote control to enter the
    numbers for the value. You can also enter numbers
    using the ▲▼ buttons. Use the ◄► buttons on the
    remote control to move from entry field to entry field
    within a value. When done with one value, press the
    E button.

    3.

    Press the WPS(PBC) button on your router within
    two minutes. Your product automatically acquires all
    the network settings values it needs and connects
    to your network.
    The product connects to the network after the
    network connection is verified.

    4.

    When it is done, highlight OK, and then press E
    button.

    9.

    Press the ▲ or ▼ button to move to another value,
    and then enter the numbers for that value following
    the instructions in Step 8.

    | NOTES |

    \ For WPS connection, set your wireless router’s
    security encryption to AES. Setting to WEP security
    encryption does not support WPS connection.

    10. Repeat Steps 8 and 9 until you have filled in all
    values.
    | NOTES |

    Wi-Fi Direct

    \ You can get the Network values from your Internet

    The Wi-Fi Direct function allows you to connect Wi-Fi
    Direct devices to the product and each other using a
    peer-to-peer network, without a wireless router.

    provider.
    11. When finished, select OK, and then press the E
    button. The Security Screen appears.
    12. On the Security screen, enter your network's
    Security Code or Pass Phrase. Enter numbers
    directly using the number buttons on your remote
    control. Enter letters by selecting a letter with the
    ▲▼◄► buttons, and then pressing the E button.
    13. When finished, select Done at the right of the
    screen, and then press the E button. The product
    verifies the network connection and then connects
    to the network.
    14. After the home cinema verifies the network, select
    OK, and then press the E button.

    | NOTES |

    \ Some Wi-Fi Direct devices may not support the
    AllShare function if connected via Wi-Fi Direct. If this is
    the case, change the network connection method you
    used to connect the device to the home cinema.
    \ Wi-Fi Direct transmissions can interfere with the
    Bluetooth signal. Before you use the Bluetooth
    function, we strongly recommend that you turn off
    the Wi-Fi Direct function on any device in which it is
    currently on.
    1. Turn on the Wi-Fi direct device and activate its Wi-Fi
    Direct function.
    2.

    In the Home screen, select Settings, and then
    press the E button.

    3.

    Select Network, and then press the E button.

    4.

    Select Wi-Fi Direct, and then press the E button.
    The Wi-Fi Direct devices that you can connect
    appear.

    | NOTES |

    \ You can also begin the Manual Network setting by
    going to Settings >Network > Network Status.
    ❑ WPS(PBC)

    One of the easiest ways to set up the wireless network
    connection is using the WPS(PBC) function. If your
    wireless router has a WPS(PBC) button, follow these
    steps:
    After following Steps 1 to 3 in "Configuring Your Network
    Connection" on page 25:

    English

    27 |

    Settings

    The Network connection fail screen appears. Use
    ◄► buttons to select IP Settings, and then press
    the E button.

    04

    6.



  • Page 28

    Settings
    4.
    Wi-Fi Direct
    Device Name : [HTS]F9750W
    Select your Wi-Fi Direct device to connect to.
    AndroidXXXXXXX

    Disconnected

    The Connecting pop-up appears, followed by the
    Connected pop-up. When it closes, you should
    see the device listed on the Wi-Fi Direct screen as
    connected.

    | NOTES |

    \ The current wired or wireless network connection
    Refresh
    Close

    5.

    You have three ways to complete the Wi-Fi
    connection:
    • Through the Wi-Fi device.
    • Through the product using PBC.
    • Through the product using a PIN.

    will be disconnected when you use the Wi-Fi Direct
    function.
    \ Text files, such as files with a .TXT or .DOC extension,
    will not display when you are using the Wi-Fi Direct
    function.

    Upgrading Software
    The Software Update menu allows you to upgrade the
    product’s software for performance improvements or
    additional services.
    • Never turn the product off or back on manually
    during the update process.

    Each is covered below.

    Through the Wi-Fi Device
    1.

    2.

    3.

    1.

    On the Wi-Fi device, follow the device's procedure
    for connecting to another Wi-Fi Direct device. See
    the device's user manual for instructions.

    In the Home menu, select Settings, and then press
    the E button.

    2.

    Select Support, and then press the E button.

    When you have completed the procedure, you
    should see a pop-up on your TV screen saying that
    a device that supports Wi-Fi Direct has requested to
    connect. Select OK, and then press the E button
    to accept.

    3.

    Select Software Update, and then press the E
    button.

    4.

    To download update software and update now,
    select Update now, and then press the E button.
    See "Update now" on next page for details.

    5.

    To let the product download update software
    automatically when available, select Auto update,
    and then press the E button. See "Auto update"
    on the next page for details.

    The Connecting pop-up appears, followed by the
    Connected pop-up. When it closes, you should
    see the device listed on the Wi-Fi Direct screen as
    connected.

    | NOTES |
    • The PBC and PIN procedures connect devices
    automatically.

    Through the Product Using PBC
    1.

    Select the Wi-Fi Direct device you want to connect
    to this product, and then press the E button.

    2.

    The Connecting pop-up appears, followed by the
    Connected pop-up. When it closes, you should
    see the device listed on the Wi-Fi Direct screen as
    connected.

    Through the Product Using a PIN
    1.

    Select the Wi-Fi Direct device you want to connect
    to this product, and then press the E button.

    2.

    The PIN pop-up appears.

    3.

    Note the PIN code in the pop-up, and then enter it
    into the appropriate field in the Wi-Fi Direct device
    you want to connect.

    | 28 English

    \ The upgrade is complete when the product turns off,
    and then turns on again by itself.

    \ Samsung Electronics takes no legal responsibility for
    product malfunction caused by an unstable Internet
    connection or consumer negligence during a software
    upgrade.
    \ If you want to cancel the upgrade while the upgrade
    software is downloading, press the E button.
    \ When a system upgrade is progress, "UPDATE" is
    displayed on the front panel.



  • Page 29

    Update by USB

    You can use Update now to update the software through
    your network connection or by using a USB flash drive.
    The network instructions are below. The USB flash drive
    instructions are on this page.

    1.

    Visit www.samsung.com.

    2.

    Click SUPPORT on the top right of the page.

    3.

    Enter the product's model number into the search
    field. As you enter the model number, a drop down
    will display products that match the model number.

    4.

    Left click your product's model number in the drop
    down list.

    5.

    On the page that appears, scroll down to and then
    click Firmware Manuals & Downloads.

    Select Update now, and then press the E button.
    The Update now pop-up appears.

    2.

    The product searches on line for the latest software
    version.

    3.

    If it does not find an update, the "There are no new
    updates for you at the moment." pop-up appears.
    Press the E button to exit.

    6.

    Click Firmware in the centre of the page.
    Click the ZIP button in the File column on the right
    side of the page.

    4.

    If it finds a new version, the Update Request popup appears.

    7.

    5.

    Select OK. The product upgrades the software,
    turns off, and then turns on automatically.

    8.

    6.

    If you do not select OK or Cancel in one minute,
    the product stores the new upgrade software. You
    can upgrade the software later using Auto update.

    Click Send in the first pop-up that appears.
    Click OK in the second pop-up to download and
    save the firmware file to your PC.

    9.

    If you select Cancel, the product cancells the
    upgrade.

    Unzip the zip archive to your computer. You should
    have a single folder with the same name as the zip
    file.

    10. Copy the folder to a USB flash drive.

    7.

    | NOTES |

    \ When the system upgrade is done, check the
    software details in the Product Information section of
    the Contact Samsung screen.
    \ Do not turn off the product during the software
    upgrade. It may cause the product to malfunction.

    Auto update
    You can set the Auto update function so that the product
    downloads new upgrade software when it is in Auto
    update mode.
    In Auto update mode, the product is off, but its Internet
    connection is active. This allows the product to download
    upgrade software automatically, when you are not using
    it.
    1.

    Press the ▲▼ buttons to select Auto update, and
    then press the E button.

    2.

    Select On or Off.
    If you select On, the product will automatically
    download new upgrade software when it is in Auto
    update mode with the power off. If it downloads
    new upgrade software, the product will ask you if
    you want to install it when you turn the product on.

    11. Make sure no disc is inserted in the product, and
    then insert the USB flash drive into the USB port of
    the product.
    12. In the product’s menu, go to Settings > Support >
    Software Update.
    13. Select Update now.
    14. The product searches for the software on the
    USB drive. When it finds the software,the Update
    Request pop-up appears.
    15. Select OK. The product upgrades the software,
    turns off, and then turns on automatically.
    | NOTES |

    \ There should be no disc in the product when you
    upgrade the software using the USB jack.

    \ When the system upgrade is done, check the
    software details in the Product Information section of
    the Contact Samsung screen.
    \ Do not turn off the product during the software
    upgrade. It may cause the product to malfunction.
    \ Software upgrades using the USB jack must be
    performed with a USB flash drive only.

    | NOTES |

    \ To use the Auto update function, your product must
    be connected to the Internet.

    English

    29 |

    Settings

    1.

    04

    Update now



  • Page 30

    Media Play
    Your home cinema can play content located on Blu-ray/
    DVD/CD discs, USB devices, PCs, smart phones, tablets,
    and on the Web.
    To play content located on your PC or a mobile device,
    you must connect the PC or mobile device and the
    product to your network. To play content on your PC, you
    must also download and install AllShare network software
    or already have DLNA network software on your PC.

    Method 1
    1.

    Turn the product on.

    2.

    Connect the USB device to the USB port on
    the front panel of the product. The New Device
    Connected pop-up appears.

    | NOTES |

    \ PCs running Windows 7 and Windows 8 have DLNA

    Movies & TV
    V
    Shows

    software (Play To) built in.

    Apps
    New device connected.
    USB Flash Disk

    Pho
    Photos,
    Videos
    Vide
    e &
    Music
    Muss

    Photos

    The All Content Screen

    Videos
    Music
    All Content

    For all media, the All Content screen or one of its sub
    screens is your primary means of accessing and playing
    contents saved on a variety of devices, either connected
    directly or using your network.

    Add App

    Using the All Content Screen

    | NOTES |

    To access the All Content screen, select Photos, Videos
    & Music on the Home screen, and then press the E
    button.

    3.

    Add App

    Add App

    Web Browser

    Settings

    \ If the pop-up does not appear, go to Method 2.

    Playing Commercial Discs

    Use the ▲▼ buttons to select Photos, Videos,
    Music or All Content, and then press the E
    button. Depending on how the contents are
    arranged, you will see either folders, individual files,
    or both.

    1.

    Press the  button to open the disc tray.

    | NOTES |

    2.

    Place a disc gently into the disc tray with the disc’s
    label facing up.

    \ Even though the product will display folders for all
    content types, it will only display files of the Content
    Type you selected in Step 3. For example, if you
    selected music, you will only be able to see music
    files. You can change this selection by returning to
    the AllShare Play screen, and then going to Step 4 in
    Method 2 below.
    4. If necessary, use the ▲▼◄► buttons to select a
    folder, and then press the E button.
    5.

    Select a file to view or play, and then press the E
    button.

    3.

    Press the  button to close the disc tray.
    Playback starts automatically.

    6.

    4.

    If playback does not start automatically, press the
    6 button on the remote or see “The All Content
    Screen” above.

    Press the RETURN button to exit a folder or the
    Exit button to return to the Home screen.

    7.

    Go to pages 32~40 for instructions that explain how
    to control playback of videos, music, and pictures
    on a USB device.

    Playing Files on a USB Device
    There are two methods you can use to play or view
    multimedia files located on a USB device through your
    product.

    | 30 English

    Method 2
    1.

    Turn the product on.

    2.

    Connect the USB device to the USB port on the
    front panel of the product.

    3.

    Select Photos, Videos & Music on the Home
    screen, and then press the E button.



  • Page 31

    | NOTES |

    4.

    If necessary, use the ▲▼◄► buttons to select a
    folder, and then press the E button.

    5.

    Use the ▲▼◄► buttons to select a file to view or
    play, and then press the E button.

    6.

    Press the RETURN button one or more times to
    exit a current screen, exit a folder, or to return to the
    Home screen.
    Press the Exit button to return directly to the Home
    Screen.

    Media Play

    Select Photos, Videos, Music or All Content, and
    then press the E button.
    Depending on how the contents are arranged, you
    will see either folders, individual files, or both.

    05

    4.

    7.

    Go to pages 32~40 for instructions that explain how
    to control playback of videos, music, and pictures
    on a disc.

    \ Even though the product will display folders for all
    content types, it will only display files of the Content
    Type you selected in Step 4. For example, if you
    selected music, you will only be able to see music
    files. You can change this selection by returning to the
    AllShare Play screen and repeating Step 4.
    5. Use the ◄► buttons to select the desired device
    and then press the E button.
    6.

    If necessary, use the ▲▼◄► buttons to select a
    folder, and then press the E button.

    7.

    Press the RETURN button to exit a folder or the
    Exit button to return to the Home screen.

    8.

    Go to pages 32~40 for instructions that explain how
    to control playback of videos, music, and pictures
    on a USB device.

    | NOTES |

    \ If you insert a disc when playing a USB device
    or phone, the device mode changes to "Disc"
    automatically.
    \ If your cellular phone is DLNA compatible, you can
    play contents without connecting a USB cable. See
    "Using the AllShare Network Function" on page 31.

    Playing a Disc with User Recorded
    Content

    Using the AllShare Network
    Function
    AllShare lets you play Photos, Videos or Music located
    on your PC or your DLNA compatible device through the
    product using a wireless network connection.

    To Download the AllShare Software
    To use AllShare with your PC, you must install AllShare
    software on your PC. You can download the PC software
    and get detailed instructions for using AllShare from the
    Samsung.com website.
    1.

    Go to www.samsung.com.

    2.

    Click Support at the top of the page.

    3.

    On the Support page, enter the model number of
    your product into the Model Number field, and then
    press the E button.

    4.

    On the page that appears, click See All Downloads
    on the left side of the screen under Downloads. The
    Download Tab appears.

    5.

    On the Download Tab, click Software.

    6.

    In the list of software, click the EXE button on the
    right side of the AllShare line.

    You can play multimedia files you have recorded on Bluray, DVD, or CD discs.
    1.

    2.

    Place a user recorded disc into the disc tray with
    the disc’s label facing up, and then close the tray.
    The Device Connected pop-up appears.
    Use the ▲▼ buttons to select the type of content
    you want to view or play - Photos, Videos or Music
    - and then press the E button.

    | NOTES |

    \ Even though the product will display folders for all
    content types, it will only display files of the Content
    Type you selected in Step 2. For example, if you
    selected music, you will only be able to see music
    files. You can change this selection by returning to the
    Home screen and repeating Step 2.
    3. A screen appears listing the contents of the disc.
    Depending on how the contents are arranged, you
    will see either folders, individual files, or both.

    7.

    In the pop-up that appears, click the Send button.

    8.

    In the next pop-up, click Save File.

    9.

    Find the AllShare install file on your disk, and then
    double click the file.

    10. In the pop-up that appears, click Run, and then
    follow the directions that appear on your screen.
    Download the AllShare Installation/Instruction manual from
    the same Software Tab by clicking the corresponding
    PDF file symbol in the File column on the right. The file, in
    PDF format, will download and open. You can view and/
    or save the file.

    English

    31 |



  • Page 32

    Media Play
    Playing Content Located on your PC or
    DLNA Device through the Product
    PC

    1.

    Connect the product, your PC, and your DLNA
    compatible cellular phone to the same wireless
    network.

    2.

    Follow the directions in the AllShare software
    Installation/Instruction manual to set up devices and
    files for playing or viewing.

    3.

    On your computer, using the AllShare software,
    confirm your phone is connected.

    4.

    On the phone, select the file you want to view or
    play, and then select the Home cinema system as
    the playback device.

    5.

    On the phone, start playback.

    Product

    Play back
    PC's files
    AllShare Connection
    1.

    Connect the product, your PC, and/or your DLNA
    compatible device to the same wireless network.

    2.

    Follow the directions in the AllShare software
    Installation/Instruction manual to set up devices and
    files for playing or viewing.

    3.

    Select Photos, Videos & Music on the product's
    Home screen, and then press the E button. The
    AllShare Play screen appears.

    4.

    Select the type of content you want to play Photos, Videos, Music or All Content - and then
    press the E button.

    5.

    On the next screen, select AllShare, and then press
    the E button.

    6.

    In the list of AllShare connected devices that
    appears, select your PC or other AllShare
    compatible device, and then press the E button.
    A screen listing the available files appears.

    7.

    Select the file you want to play or view, and then
    press the E button.

    Controlling Video Playback
    You can control the playback of video content located on
    a Blu-ray/DVD disc, USB device, mobile device or PC.
    Depending on the disc or contents, some of the functions
    described in this manual may not be available.

    Buttons on the Remote Control used
    for Video Playback
    DISC
    MENU

    1

    1 Using the disc menu, title menu, popup menu and
    title list
    DISC MENU

    During playback, press this button to
    display the Disc menu.

    TITLE
    MENU

    During playback, press this button to
    display the Title menu.
    • If your disc has a playlist, press the
    View button to go to the playlist.

    POPUP
    MENU

    During playback, press this button to
    display the Popup menu.

    PC
    Product
    5V
    0.5A

    Play back
    PC's files
    Control PC's files
    to Product
    Smart Phone
    (Only available with Samsung phones supporting AllShare
    functionality.)

    | 32 English

    TITLE MENU
    POPUP

    2

    Controlling the Playback of Content
    Located on Your PC with your Smart
    Phone

    AllShare
    Connection

    0



  • Page 33

    You can use the Search Scene
    function during playback to view
    or start a movie from the scene of
    your choice.

    \ If the index information in the file

    Starts playback.

    Fast Motion
    Play

    During playback, press the 3 or 4
    button.
    Each time you press the 3 or 4
    button, the playback speed will
    change.

    is damaged or the file does not
    support indexing, you will not be
    able to use the Search Scene
    function.
    \ If you are using the DLNA
    function after connecting to a
    computer through your network,
    Search Scene may not be
    supported.

    Slow Motion
    Play

    In pause mode, press the 4 button.
    Each time you press the 4 button,
    the playback speed will change.

    If there is more than one movie on
    the disc or device, select to start a
    different title.

    Step Motion
    Play

    In pause mode, press the 7 button.
    Each time you press the 7 button, a
    new frame appears.

    Skip Motion
    Play

    During playback, press the 1 or 2
    button.
    Each time you press the 1 or 2
    button, the disc moves to the previous
    or next chapter or file.

    5

    Stops playback.

    7

    Pauses playback.

    Search Scene

    Search Titles

    1.

    Select Search Titles, and
    then press the E button.

    2.

    Use the ▲▼ buttons to select
    a title, and then press the E
    button.

    Select to play the chapter of your
    choice.
    Chapter
    Search

    Using the TOOLS Menu

    1.

    Select Chapter Search, and
    then press the E button.

    2.

    Use the ▲▼ buttons to select
    a chapter, and then press the
    E button.

    During playback, press the TOOLS button.
    Play from the
    Beginning

    Use 3D menu to select Side by
    Side or Top Bottom option if the
    3D content currently playing does
    not properly appear in 3D mode.
    3D

    Select to play the movie from a
    selected time point.

    Select to return to the beginning of
    the movie, and then press the E
    button.

    | NOTES |

    \ Use 3D menu only for 3D
    contents of Side by Side or Top
    Bottom format. If applied to 2D
    contents, it may not be displayed
    properly.

    Search Time
    Bar

    1.

    Select Search Time Bar, and
    then press the E button.

    2.

    Using the number buttons,
    enter the time point you want
    to go to, and then press the
    E button.

    | NOTES |

    \ You can also use the ◄►
    buttons to advance or rewind
    the movie. The movie advances
    or rewinds one minute each tme
    you press the ◄► buttons.

    English

    33 |

    Media Play

    | NOTES |
    6

    05

    2 Playback related buttons
    The product does not play sound in Search, Slow, or
    Step mode.
    • To return to normal speed playback, press the 6
    button.



  • Page 34

    Media Play
    Select to repeat a title, chapter, or
    specific section.
    - Off : Select to return to normal
    playback.
    - Title : Choose to repeat a
    selected title.
    - Chapter : Choose to repeat a
    specific chapter.
    - Repeat A-B : Choose to repeat
    a specific section.
    1.

    Press the ▲▼ buttons to
    select Repeat A-B, and then
    press the E button.

    2.

    Press the E button at the
    point where you want repeat
    play to start (A). Let the movie
    play.

    Repeat Mode

    3.

    Press the E button at the
    point where you want repeat
    play to stop (B).

    | NOTES |

    Select to set the Equaliser.
    Equaliser
    Settings

    Picture Mode

    Select to set the picture mode.
    - Dynamic : Increases sharpness
    and brightness.
    - Standard : Choose this setting
    for most viewing applications.
    - Movie : The best setting for
    watching movies.
    - User : Lets you adjust the
    sharpness and noise reduction
    function respectively.
    | NOTES |

    \ When you use the BD wise
    function, this menu will not
    appear.
    Equaliser
    Mode

    | 34 English

    Select to use the Equaliser.

    \ It only appears when equaliser
    mode is on.

    Audio

    Audio Sync

    Select to set the desired audio
    language.
    In some cases when the product is
    connected to a digital TV, the audio
    signal may not synchronize with the
    video signal. If this occurs, adjust
    the audio delay time to match the
    video signal.

    Subtitle

    Select to set the desired subtitle
    language.

    Subtitle
    Settings

    Select to set the desired subtitle
    options.

    Angle

    To view a scene from another
    angle. The Angle option displays
    the number of angles available to
    view (1/1, 1/2, 1/3, etc.).

    \ You must set point (B) at least
    5 seconds of playing time after
    point (A).

    | NOTES |

    BONUSVIEW
    Video
    BONUSVIEW
    Audio

    Select to set the desired bonusview
    option.

    Full Screen

    Select to set the size of the video
    image. Choose Original, Mode1
    (larger), or Mode2 (largest).

    Information

    Select to view video file information.

    | NOTES |

    \ Depending on the disc or storage device, the Tools
    menu may differ.

    \ Video files with high bit rates of 20Mbps or more strain
    the product’s capabilities and may stop playing during
    playback.



  • Page 35

    Using the View & Options Menus

    Date

    View

    Displays all the folders with
    videos by date. If you select
    a folder, and then press E
    button, displays all the videos
    in the folder by date.

    Title

    Displays all the video files on
    the media or storage device
    by title.

    Folder

    Displays all the folders on the
    media or storage device.

    You can control the playback of music content located on
    a DVD, CD, USB, mobile device or PC. Depending on the
    disc or contents, some of the functions described in this
    manual may not be available.

    Buttons on the Remote Control used
    for Music Playback

    1

    1
    4
    7
    DISC
    MENU

    Play
    Selected

    Play Selected lets you
    create a playlist by selecting
    specific files to play. It works
    essentially the same way for
    all media. See Creating a
    Playlist from a CD on page
    37.

    2
    5
    8
    0

    3
    6
    9
    TITLE MENU
    POPUP

    2

    4
    5
    6

    3

    1

    NUMBER buttons : If numbered tracks are
    displayed, press the number of a track. The
    selected track is played.

    2

    1 2 buttons : Move to the previous/next
    track.

    3

    5 button : Stops a track.

    4

    Fast Play (Audio CD (CD-DA) only)
    During playback, press the 3 or 4 button.
    Each time you press the 3 or 4 button, the
    playback speed will change.

    5

    7 button : Pause a track.

    6

    6 button : Plays the currently selected track.

    Options

    Send

    Select Send to upload
    selected files to apps (Picasa,
    Facebook etc) or devices.
    To use Send, you need to
    establish an account with the
    on-line site, and then log in
    using the Log In function.

    | NOTES |

    \ Depending on the disc or storage device, the Options
    View menus may differ. All options may not be
    displayed.
    \ The View and Options menus are usually available
    when you are viewing video files on a USB flash
    drive, a PC, a disc you recorded yourself, or a mobile
    device. They are usually not available if you are viewing
    a commercial Blu-ray, DVD, or CD disc.

    English

    35 |

    Media Play

    Videos

    Controlling Music Playback
    05

    On the screen that lists the video files, use the ▲▼◄►
    buttons to select View or Options in the upper right, and
    then press the E button.



  • Page 36

    Media Play
    Music Screen Controls

    Using the View & Options Menus

    Options

    TRACK 001
    00:09

    00:43

    off

    off

    TRACK 001

    00:43

    TRACK 002

    03:56

    TRACK 003

    04:41

    TRACK 004

    04:02

    TRACK 005

    03:43

    TRACK 006

    03:40

    TRACK 007

    04:06

    TRACK 008

    03:52

    TRACK 009

    03:04

    TRACK 010

    04:02

    On the screen that lists the music files, use the ▲▼◄►
    buttons to select View or Options in the upper right, and
    then press the E button.
    Music

    View

    Track

    Displays all the music
    tracks on the media or
    storage device.

    Album

    Displays all the music on
    the media or storage by
    album.

    Artist

    Displays all the music files
    on the media or storage
    device by artist

    Genre

    Displays all music on
    the media or storage by
    genre.

    Folder

    Displays all the folders
    on the media or storage
    device.

    Play
    Selected

    Play Selected lets you
    create a playlist by
    selecting specific files to
    play. It works essentially
    the same way for all
    media. See Creating a
    Playlist on an Audio CD
    on page 37.

    Send

    Select Send to upload
    selected files to apps
    (Picasa, Facebook etc)
    or devices. To use Send,
    you need to establish an
    account with the on-line
    site, and then log in using
    the Log In function.

    Ripping

    The Ripping function
    converts CD audio to the
    mp3 format and saves
    the converted files on a
    USB device or the mobile
    device connected to the
    product. See Ripping on
    page 38.

    Pause a track.
    Play a track.
    Move to the previous track.
    Move to the next track.
    Rewind the track.
    Advance the track.
    ,

    1

    Repeat one track or all tracks.
    Play tracks in random order.
    Display the Equaliser.
    Adjust the equaliser manually.
    (Only when equaliser mode is on)

    To access the controls, play a track, and then use the
    ▲▼◄► buttons to move to the control of your choice.

    Options

    | NOTES |

    \ The Music Screen controls are only accessible when a
    track is playing.

    \ All controls do not appear at the same time.

    | 36 English



  • Page 37

    Information

    1.

    With the Playback screen displayed, select the
    Options button and then press the E button. The
    Options menu appears.

    05

    2.

    Use the  buttons to select Play Selected , and
    then press the E button. The Play Selected screen
    appears.

    3.

    Use the  buttons to select a track, and then
    press the E button. A check appears to the left of
    the track.

    Media Play

    Encoding

    Creating a Playlist from a CD

    Select to see content
    information.

    4.

    Repeat Step 3 to select and check additional tracks.

    5.

    To remove a track from the list, move to the track,
    and then press the E button again. The check on
    the track is removed.

    6.

    When done, press the  buttons to select Play,
    and then press the E button. The Music Playback
    screen reappears listing only the tracks you
    checked. The selected tracks play automatically.

    Select to manage the text
    encoding options.

    | NOTES |

    \ Depending on the disc or storage device, the Options
    menu may differ. All options may not be displayed.

    Repeating Tracks on an Audio CD
    You can set the product to repeat tracks on an audio CD
    (CD-DA/MP3).
    1.

    During playback, use the ▲▼◄► buttons to select
    in the lower left corner of the screen, and then
    press the E button.

    2.

    Use the ▲▼ to select the Repeat mode you want
    - Off, One Song, or All - and then press the E
    button.

    | NOTES |

    \ You can create a playlist with up to 99 tracks from
    Options

    TRACK 001
    00:09

    00:43

    off

    off

    Audio CDs (CD-DA).

    \ If you have created a playlist, Play Selected is

    TRACK 001

    00:43

    TRACK 002

    03:56

    replaced by Edit playlist on the Options menu.

    TRACK 003

    04:41

    TRACK 004

    04:02

    \ On the Play Selected screen, you can also choose

    TRACK 005

    03:43

    Select All, Deselect All, and Cancel.

    TRACK 006

    03:40

    ~ Use Select All to select all tracks. This cancells

    TRACK 007

    04:06

    TRACK 008

    03:52

    TRACK 009

    03:04

    TRACK 010

    04:02

    your individual track selections. When you press
    the RETURN button on your remote or select Play
    and then press the E button, all tracks will appear
    on the Music Playback screen, and the product will
    begin to play all tracks from Track 001.
    ~ Use Deselect All to deselect all selected tracks at
    once. Then, select individual tracks or use Select
    All to select all the tracks, and then press the
    RETURN button on your remote or select Play and
    then press the E button. If you do not use Select
    All or select individual tracks, the Playlist will not
    change.
    ~ Cancel cancells any changes you made on the Play
    Select screen. When you return to the Playback
    screen, the Playlist will be unchanged.

    Shuffling Tracks on an Audio CD
    You can set the product to play tracks on an audio CD
    (CD-DA/MP3) at random.
    1.

    During playback, use the ▲▼◄► buttons to select
    in the lower left corner of the screen, and then
    press the E button.

    2.

    Use the ▲▼ to set the Shuffle mode Off or On, and
    then press the E button.

    English

    37 |



  • Page 38

    Media Play
    Ripping

    Using Bluetooth

    1.

    Insert a USB device into the USB jack on the front
    of the product.

    You can use a Bluetooth device to enjoy music with high
    quality stereo sound, all without wires!

    2.

    With the Playback screen displayed, select the
    Options button and then press the E button.
    The Options menu appears.

    What is Bluetooth?

    3.

    Use the ▲▼ buttons to select Ripping, and then
    press the E button. The Ripping screen appears.

    4.

    Use the ▲▼ buttons to select a track, and then
    press the E button. A check appears to the left of
    the track.

    5.

    Repeat Step 4 to select and check additional tracks.

    6.

    To remove a track from the list, move to the track,
    and then press the E button again. The check on
    the track is removed.

    7.

    When done, select the Rip button using the ▲▼
    buttons, and then press the E button.
    The Rip pop-up appears.

    8.

    Use the ▲▼ buttons to select the device to store
    the ripped files on, and then press the E button.

    | NOTES |

    \ Do not disconnect the device while ripping is in
    9.

    progress.
    If you want to cancel ripping, press the E button
    and then select Yes. Select No to continue ripping.

    10. When ripping is complete, the “Successfully
    Ripped.” message appears. Press the Ebutton.
    11. Press the RETURN button to go back to the
    Playback screen.
    | NOTES |

    \ This function is not available with DTS Audio CDs.
    \ This function may not be supported by some discs.
    \ Ripping encodes music to the .mp3 format at
    192kbps.
    \ On the Ripping screen, you can also choose Select
    All and or Clear All.
    - Use Select All to select all tracks and press the E
    button. This cancells your individual track selections.
    - Use Clear All to deselect all selected tracks at once.

    Bluetooth is a technology that enables Bluetoothcompliant devices to interconnect with each other easily
    using a short wireless connection.
    • A Bluetooth device may hum or malfunction:
    - When a part of your body is in contact with the
    receiving/transmitting system of the Bluetooth device
    or the Home Cinema.
    - When it is subject to electrical variation from
    obstructions caused by a wall, corner or office
    partitioning.
    - When it is exposed to electrical interference from
    same frequency-band devices including medical
    equipment, microwave ovens and wireless LANs.
    • Pair the Home Cinema with the Bluetooth device while
    the two are close together.
    • The further the distance is between the Home Cinema
    and the Bluetooth device, the worse the quality is.
    If the distance exceeds the Bluetooth operational
    range, the connection is lost.
    • In poor reception-sensitivity areas, the Bluetooth
    connection may not work properly.
    • The Home Cinema has an effective reception range
    of up to 10 meters in all directions if there are no
    obstacles. The connection will be automatically cut off
    if the device is out of this range. Even within this range,
    the sound quality may be degraded by obstacles such
    as walls or doors.
    • This wireless device may cause an electric interference
    during its operation.

    To connect the Home Cinema to a
    Bluetooth device

    Connect

    Bluetooth device
    Check if the Bluetooth device supports the Bluetooth
    compliant stereo headset function.

    | 38 English



  • Page 39

    2.

    Select the Bluetooth menu on the Bluetooth device
    you want to connect. For instructions, refer to the
    Bluetooth device's manual.

    3.

    Select the Stereo headset menu on the Bluetooth
    device.
    • You will see a list of devices.

    4.

    Select "[HTS]Fxxxxx" from the searched list.
    • When the Home Cinema is connected to the
    Bluetooth device, the device name of the
    connected Bluetooth device, followed by the
    name of home cinema will appear on the front
    display of home cinema.

    5.

    Play music on the connected device.
    • You can listen to the music playing on the
    connected Bluetooth device over the Home
    Cinema system.

    | NOTES |

    \ The Home Cinema only supports Middle Quality SBC
    data (up to 237kbps@48kHz), and does not support
    High Quality SBC data (328kbps@44.1kHz).
    \ The AVRCP feature is supported. It's functionality
    will differ, depending on the specifications of the
    connected device.
    \ Connect only to a Bluetooth device that supports the
    A2DP Profile.
    \ Only one Bluetooth device can be paired at a time.
    \ The search or connection functions may not work
    properly in the following cases:
    - If there a strong electric field near or around the
    home cinema.
    - If several Bluetooth devices are simultaneously
    paired with product.
    - If the Bluetooth device is turned off, not in place, or
    malfunctions.
    - Note that such devices as microwave ovens, wireless
    LAN adapters, fluorescent lights, and gas stoves use
    the same frequency range as the Bluetooth device,
    and can cause electric interference.

    To disconnect the Bluetooth device from
    the Home Cinema
    You can disconnect the Bluetooth device from the Home
    Cinema. For instructions, refer to the Bluetooth device's
    manual.
    • When the Home Cinema is disconnected from the
    Bluetooth device, the Home Cinema will display
    DISCONNECTED on the front display.

    To disconnect the Home Cinema from the
    Bluetooth device
    Press the (
    ) button on the front panel of the Home
    Cinema to switch from BT to another mode or turn off
    the Home Cinema.
    • Except when you disconnect the home cinema by
    changing functions, the connected Bluetooth device
    will wait a certain time for a response from the
    Home Cinema before terminating the connection.
    (Disconnection time may differ, depending on the
    Bluetooth device.)
    | NOTES |

    \ In Bluetooth connection mode, the Bluetooth
    connection will be lost if the distance between the
    Home Cinema System and the Bluetooth device
    exceeds 10 meters. When the Bluetooth device
    comes back into effective range or you restart the
    Bluetooth device, you have to pair the device and
    home cinema again to reconnect.
    \ In Bluetooth mode, the screen saver will start if
    the Bluetooth device stays in the Ready state for 5
    minutes. To reconnect the Bluetooth device, turn off
    the screen saver, and then connect the device. To turn
    off the Screen saver, press any button on the remote
    control (the Volume button, a number button, etc.)

    Playing Photo Contents
    You can play photo contents located on a DVD, USB,
    mobile device or PC.

    Using the Tools Menu
    During playback, press the TOOLS button.
    Previous

    Select to move to the previous
    picture.

    Next

    Select to move to the next picture.

    Start / Stop
    Slide Show

    Select to play/pause the slide show.

    Slideshow
    Settings

     Speed : Select to set a slide
    show's speed.
     Effects : Select to set a slide
    show's special effects.

    Zoom

    Select to enlarge the current
    picture. (Enlarge up to 4 times)

    English

    39 |

    Media Play

    Press the FUNCTION button on the remote control
    of the product to display the BT message.

    05

    1.



  • Page 40

    Media Play
    Rotate
    Background
    Music

    Settings

    Select to rotate the picture. (This will
    rotate the picture either clockwise
    or counter clockwise.)

    Folder

    Select to listen to music while
    viewing a slide show.
     Picture Mode
    - Dynamic : Choose to increase
    Sharpness.
    - Standard : Choose for most
    viewing applications.
    - Movie : This is the best setting
    for watching movies.
    - User : Lets you adjust the
    sharpness and noise reduction
    function respectively.
     Information : Shows the picture
    information.

    Equaliser
    Mode

    Customize your own personal
    sound preferences using the
    equaliser settings.

    Equaliser
    Settings

    This function is only available when
    Equaliser Mode is On.

    Slide Show

    Options

    | NOTES |

    \ Depending on the disc or storage device, the Options

    Displays all the folders
    on the media or storage
    device.
    Starts the slide show.
    Shows all the files in the
    current folder, one after
    another. If you want to
    create a slide show with a
    selected group of photos,
    see Play Selected below.

    Play
    Selected

    Play Selected lets you
    create a playlist by
    selecting specific files to
    play. It works essentially
    the same way for all
    media. See Creating a
    Playlist on an Audio CD
    on page 37.

    Send

    Select Send to upload
    selected files to on line
    sites (Picasa, Facebook
    etc) or devices. To use
    Send, you need to
    establish an account with
    the on-line site, and then
    log in using the Log In
    function.

    menu may differ. All options may not be displayed.

    \ To enable the background music function, the photo

    | NOTES |

    file must be in the same storage media as the music
    file. However, the sound quality can be affected by the
    bit rate of the MP3 file, the size of the photo, and the
    encoding method.
    \ You can't enlarge the subtitle and PG graphic in the
    full screen mode.

    \ Depending on the disc or storage device, the Options

    Using the View and Options Menus
    When you See the Photo File List
    Photos

    Date

    Groups all the photo files
    on the media or storage
    device by Date. Click a
    group to see the photos in
    that group.

    Title

    Displays all the photo files
    on the media or storage
    device by title.

    View

    | 40 English

    menu may differ. All options may not be displayed.



  • Page 41

    Listening to Radio

    Using the Special Effects Remote
    Control Buttons
    05

    Using Buttons on the Remote Control
    Press the FUNCTION button to select FM.
    Tune to the desired station.
    • Preset Tuning 1 : Press the 5 button to select
    Preset and then press the TUNING/CH (,.)
    button to select the preset station.
    - Before you can tune to preset stations, you
    must add preset stations to the product's
    memory.
    • Manual Tuning : Press the 5 button to select
    Manual and then press the TUNING/CH (,.)
    button to tune to a lower or higher frequency.
    • Automatic Tuning : Press the 5 button to select
    Manual and then press and hold the TUNING/
    CH (,.) button to automatically search the
    band.

    Setting Mono/Stereo
    Press the MO/ST button.
    • Each time the button is pressed, the sound switches
    between STEREO and MONO.
    • In a poor reception area, select MONO for a clear,
    interference-free broadcast.

    Presetting Stations
    Example : Presetting FM 89.10 into memory.
    1.

    Press the FUNCTION button to select FM.

    2.

    Press the TUNING/CH (,.) button to select
    <89.10>.

    3.

    Press the TUNER MEMORY button.
    • NUMBER flashes on the display.
    Press the TUNER MEMORY button again.
    • Press the TUNER MEMORY button before
    NUMBER disappears from the display on its own.
    • After you press the TUNER MEMORY button,
    NUMBER disappears from the display and the
    station is stored in memory.

    4.

    5.

    To preset another station, repeat steps 2 to 4.
    • To tune to a preset station, press the 5 button
    to select Preset and then press the TUNING/CH
    (,.) button to select the preset station.

    Media Play

    1.
    2.

    SOUND
    EFFECT

    SOUND EFFECT Function

    Lets you select a mode that optimizes the sound.
    1.

    Press the SOUND EFFECT button.

    2.

    Press the ▲▼ button to select the desired mode:
    DSP, Dolby Pro Logic II or SFE Mode.

    3.

    Press the ◄► buttons to select the desired
    sound effect.

    ❑ DSP

    MP3 Enhancer  Power Bass  Football  Off
    • MP3 Enhancer : Helps enhance your sound
    experience (ex. mp3 music). You can upscale your
    MP3 level sound (24 kHz, 8bit) to CD level sound
    (44.1 kHz, 16bit).
    • Power Bass : Increases the volume level of bass
    tones and provides thudding sound effects.
    • Football : Creates a more dynamic, realistic,
    stadium like sound. For listening to football, soccer,
    and other sporting events.
    • Off : Select for normal listening.
    ❑ Dolby Pro Logic II

    Movie  Music  Game  Matrix  Pro Logic 
    Off
    • Movie : Adds realism to a movie soundtrack.
    • Music : When listening to music, you can
    experience sound effects as if you are listening to
    the actual performance.
    • Game : Enhances the excitement of a game’s
    sound.
    • Matrix : Select to hear multi channel surround
    sound.
    • Pro Logic : Select to listen to a 2CH sound source
    in 5.1CH surround sound with all speakers active.
    - A specific speaker(s) may not output depending
    on the input signal.
    • Off : Select for normal listening.

    English

    41 |



  • Page 42

    Media Play
    ❑ SFE Mode

    4.

    Symphony Hall in Boston (Hall 1)  Philharmonic
    Hall in Bratislava (Hall 2)  Jazz Club in Seoul B
     Church in Seoul  Amphitheater (Rock)  Off
    • Symphony Hall in Boston (Hall 1) : Provides a
    clear vocal as if listening in a concert hall.
    • Philharmonic Hall in Bratislava (Hall 2) : Also
    provides a clear vocal as if listening in a concert
    hall but, less powerful than HALL1.
    • Jazz Club in Seoul B : Recommended setting for
    Jazz.
    • Church in Seoul : Gives the feel of being in a
    grand church.
    • Amphitheater (Rock) : Recommended setting for
    Rock.
    • Off : Select this for normal listening.

    3D Sound

    3D
    SOUND

    You can enjoy more natural and vivid surround sound
    with enriched tones by adjusting the depth of sound
    using the level options.
    Off  High  Low
    | NOTES |

    \ 3D Sound is not available in FM mode.

    TV Sound

    TV
    SOUND

    You can listen via Home theatre speakers or TV
    Speaker with TV SOUND button.
    1.

    Connect the HDMI cable to TV and Home
    cinema. (See page 17 )

    2.

    Set the connected Home cinema and TV to
    Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) On.

    3.

    Press the TV SOUND button on the remote
    control.

    | 42 English

    Each time you press the TV SOUND button, TV
    SOUND ON/OFF flashes shortly on the Display
    part on the Front panel, then change to D. IN.
    - TV SOUND ON : Output to Home theatre
    speakers.
    - TV SOUND OFF : Output to Anynet+
    connected TV Speaker.

    ❑ Use in this case:

    1) If you want to listen to the sound via home
    cinema speaker when you watch a TV.
    2) If you want to listen to the sound from the USB
    media that plugged to the TV via home cinema
    speaker.
    ❑ TV SOUND ON/OFF support specification

    Connected TV

    Anynet+
    (HDMI-CEC)
    supported TV
    Anynet+
    (HDMI-CEC) not
    supported TV

    Anynet+
    (HDMI-CEC)
    Setting

    TV
    Sound
    ON

    TV
    Sound
    OFF

    ON

    O

    O

    OFF

    O

    X

    No operation

    O

    X



  • Page 43

    Network Services
    You can enjoy various network services such as streaming
    video or on-line apps by connecting the product to your
    network.

    Connect the product to the network.
    (See page 18)

    2.

    Configure the network settings.
    (See pages 25~27)

    Logging In to Your Samsung
    Account
    Before you access Movies & TV Shows or Apps, we
    suggest you log in to your Samsung account.
    To log in to your Samsung account, follow these steps:
    1.

    With the Home screen displayed, press the RED (A)
    button. The Log In screen appears.

    2.

    Select the Email field, and then press the E
    button. The keyboard pop-up appears.

    3.

    Using the keyboard, enter your e-mail address.
    When finished, select the Done button, and then
    press the E button. The Log In screen re-appears.

    4.
    5.

    Before Using Movies & TV Shows
    or Apps
    If you haven’t set up Smart Hub, when you use Movies &
    TV Shows or Apps for the first time, the product will ask
    you to perform the Smart Hub set up procedure.
    1.

    On the Home screen, select either Movies & TV
    Shows or Apps, and then press the E button. If
    you have selected Apps, go to Step 4.

    2.

    If you selected Movies & TV Shows, the Smart Hub
    pop-up appears asking if you want to set up Smart
    Hub. Select Yes, and then press the E button.
    The Welcome screen appears.

    Select the Password field, and then press the E
    button. The keyboard pop-up appears.

    3.

    Using the keyboard, enter your password. When
    finished, select the Done button, and then press the
    E button. The Log In screen re-appears.

    Select Start, and then press the E button. The
    Smart Hub Terms & Conditions, Privacy Policy
    screen appears.

    4.

    On the Smart Hub Terms & Conditions, Privacy
    Policy screen, you must review and agree to both
    the Smart Hub Terms and Conditions and the
    Privacy Policy to use Smart Hub.

    5.

    Scroll down, and then click the View Details buttons
    to review the full documents.

    6.

    When done reading, scroll up to the first entry field,
    and press the E button to agree to the Terms and
    Conditions and consent to the Privacy Policy.

    7.

    Press the ► button twice to go to the Supplemental
    Privacy Notices screen.

    8.

    Click the View Details button to view the entire
    notice.

    9.

    When done reading, scroll up to the top entry field,
    and then press the E button.

    6.

    To make the log in process easier next time, select
    Sign me in automatically, and then press the E
    button.

    7.

    Select Log in, and then press the E button. The
    product logs you in to your account. Your account
    e-mail is displayed on the bottom left of the screen.

    | NOTES |

    \ If you selected Sign me in automatically, the next
    time you log in, the product will automatically enter
    your e-mail and password. All you need to do is select
    Log In.
    \ If your e-mail address and password are not displayed
    when the Log In screen appears, select the button
    with the down pointing arrow head next to the Email
    field, and then press the E button. A drop down list
    of all your registered accounts will appear. Select your
    account, and then press the E button. The product
    will fill in the e-mail and password fields.

    | NOTES |

    \ You do not need to consent to the Supplemental
    Privacy Notice, but one or more Smart TV features or
    functionalities may not be available if you do not.
    10. Press the ► button twice. The Setup Complete
    screen appears. Press the E button.

    English

    43 |

    Network Services

    1.

    in, the My Account pop-up appears. On the pop-up,
    you can select Logout, Change Account Information,
    Link Service Accounts, Remove Accounts from the
    Device, and Deactivate Account.
    \ To rent movies and purchase for pay apps,you must
    have a credit card registered in your account. If you
    haven’t registered a card, select Change Account
    Information. On the Change Account information
    page, select Register Card, press the E button,
    and then follow the directions on the screen.

    06

    To use network services, you must first:

    \ If you press the RED (A) button after you have logged



  • Page 44

    Network Services
    \ If you don't have a credit card associated with your

    Using Movies & TV Shows
    You can download or stream for pay and free-of-charge
    movies and TV shows and view them on your TV.

    Samsung account, after you log in, the Register
    Card screen will appear. Follow the directions on the
    screen. You must have a credit card registered to your
    account to rent movies and to purchase for-pay apps.

    Movies & TV Shows
    Featured

    Using Apps

    Recommended

    You can download the applications from the Internet, and
    access various for pay or free-of-charge application and
    view them on your TV. To access some applications, you
    need to have a Samsung account.

    The Apps Screen at a Glance
    Favourites

    Featured

    Movies

    TV Shows

    1

    Purchased

    2

    Apps

    1.

    On the Home screen, select Movies & TV Shows,
    and then press the E button.

    2.

    Select one of the Featured or Recommended
    movies, and then press the E button. The page
    for that movie appears.
    OR

    Recommended

    1

    2

    3

    4

    5
    Samsung

    TV

    My Apps

    WebBrowser

    Apps

    Apps

    Use the ▼ button to go to the bottom of the screen.
    Select Favourites, Featured, Movies, TV Shows,
    or Purchased, and then press the E button.
    On the page that appears, use the ▲▼◄► buttons
    to select a show or movie, and then press the E
    button.
    On the TV Shows or Movies screen, you can also
    select What's New?, Most Popular, or Genres to
    see more available shows or movies. On the Genre
    screen, use the ▲▼◄► buttons to select a Genre,
    and then press the E button.

    More Apps

    3

    1

    Recommended : Displays recommended
    contents managed by Samsung.
    Gives you access to various for pay or free-ofcharge applications you can download.

    2

    Featured Applications : Use the ▲▼◄►
    buttons to highlight the displayed Feature
    Application, and then press the E button.
    Information about the featured application
    appears.

    3

    My Apps : Displays your personal gallery of
    applications modifiable on the More Apps
    screen.

    4

    More Apps : Select More Apps to access
    the More Apps screen where you can add to,
    modify, and delete applications and see all
    downloaded applications.

    To make a selection on a page displaying TV shows
    or movies, use the ▲▼◄► buttons to make a
    selection, and then press the E button.
    3.

    To watch a selection, select Watch Now, and then
    press the E button. A selection screen appears
    listing various locations from which you can rent the
    film along with prices.

    4.

    Select a location, and then press the E button.
    Follow the directions on the screen to start the
    movie.

    | NOTES |

    \ If you haven't logged into your Samsung account,
    the Log in screen will appear after Step 3 and you will
    need to log in.

    | 44 English

    4



  • Page 45

    1.

    Select Apps on the Home screen, and then press
    the E button.

    1.

    On the Apps screen, select Samsung Apps, and
    then press the E button. The Samsung Apps
    screen appears.

    2.

    On the Apps screen, use the ▲▼◄► buttons to
    select an app, and then press the E button. The
    app starts.

    2.

    Across the top of the screen, under What's
    New?, you'll see a series of new apps. Use the
    ◄► buttons to scroll the list right or left, and
    then select an app. Press the E button to see
    more information about the app. If the app is free,
    select Download, and then press the E button
    to download the app. If it is a for-pay app select
    Buy, press the E button, and then follow the
    instructions on the screen.

    Using the More Apps Screen
    More Apps

    View : Date Downloaded

    Options
    1 /23

    WebBrowser

    | NOTES |
    Samsung Apps

    \ To buy an app, you must be logged into your
    Samsung account and have a credit card registered to
    the account. Press the RED (A) button on your remote
    to log in.
    \ If you haven’t registered a card, after you log in, press
    the RED (A) button again, and then select Change
    Account Information in the pop-up that appears. On
    the Change Account information page, select Register
    Card, press the E button, and then follow the
    directions on the screen.
    \ You can also access and download apps from
    the categories listed on the left of the screen. For
    instructions, see Step 4.
    3. After the app has downloaded, select Run, and
    then press the E button to run the app now.
    To run the app later, press the RETURN button. In
    either case, the icon for the app will appear on the
    Apps screen.
    4.

    To see additional apps, use the ▲▼◄► buttons
    to move to the category list on the left side of the
    screen.

    WebBrowser

    Storage

    Category : XXXXX | Version : X.XXX | Size : XX.XKB

    109.48 MB / 629.43 MB

    The More Apps Screen lists all the apps you have
    downloaded and lets you:
    • Sort the apps on the More Apps screen by Date
    Downloaded, Recently Opened, and Title.
    • Apply a number of Options Menu functions to the
    apps listed in the My Apps section of the Apps screen
    including updating apps, moving apps into a folder,
    deleting the apps from My Apps, and locking the apps.
    • Start apps.

    Sorting the Apps
    To sort the apps on the More Apps screen, follow these
    steps:
    1.

    On the Home screen, select Apps, and then press
    the E button.

    5.

    Use the ▲▼ buttons to select a category. Each
    time you move the highlight to another category, a
    different set of applications appears on the right.

    2.

    On the Apps screen, use the ▼ button to move to
    the More Apps hotspot at the bottom of the page,
    and then press the E button.

    6.

    Use the ► button to move to the applications and
    the ▲▼◄► buttons to move from app to app.

    3.

    7.

    To see more information about an app, select it, and
    then press the E button.

    On the More Apps screen, use the ▲► buttons to
    move to View at the top of the screen, and then
    press the E button.

    4.

    8.

    To download the app, follow the directions in Steps
    2 and 3.

    In the drop down that appears, select Date
    Downloaded, Recently Opened, or Title, and then
    press the E button. The apps on the More Apps
    screen are sorted by the criteria you have chosen.

    English

    45 |

    Network Services

    Starting an Application

    You can download for pay or free-of-charge applications
    through Samsung Apps.

    06

    Downloading Applications



  • Page 46

    Network Services
    Using the Options Menu Functions

    Delete an App from My Apps
    1.

    On the More Apps screen, use the ▲► buttons to
    go to Options at the top of the screen, and then
    press the E button.

    2.

    Select Edit My Apps, and then press the E
    button. The Edit My Apps screen appears.

    3.

    Select the app you want to delete from My Apps,
    press the E button, and then press the ▲▼◄►
    buttons in the direction of the .
    The Remove from My Apps pop-up appears.

    4.

    Select Yes, and then press the E button.

    5.

    When you return to the Apps screen, the app will
    have been removed from the My Apps area.

    Lock/Unlock
    Using the Lock/Unlock function and the Security PIN, you
    can lock applications so they cannot be started on either
    the Apps screen or the More Apps screen. The default
    PIN is 0000.
    1.

    On the More Apps screen, use the ▲► buttons to
    go to Options at the top of the screen, and then
    press the E button.

    2.

    Select Lock/Unlock, and then press the E
    button.

    3.

    When the Lock Service appears, enter the PIN
    using the number buttons on your remote control.

    4.

    To lock an application, select the application, and
    then press the E button. A lock appears on the
    app. Repeat to lock other, individual apps.

    5.

    To unlock a locked app, select the application, and
    then press the E button.

    6.

    To lock all the apps at once, use the ▲► buttons to
    select the Lock All button, and then press the E
    button.

    7.

    To unlock all the locked apps at once, use the ▲►
    buttons to select the Unlock All button and then
    press the E button.

    8.

    Press the RETURN button twice to return to the
    Apps screen. Locked apps will display a lock on the
    upper right side.

    Move an App in My Apps
    1.

    On the More Apps screen, use the ▲► buttons to
    go to Options at the top of the screen, and then
    press the E button.

    2.

    Select Edit My Apps, and then press the E
    button. The Edit My Apps screen appears.

    3.

    Select the app you want to move in My Apps, press
    the E button, and then press the ▲▼◄► buttons
    to move the app icon in the direction of one of the
    arrows (<, >, ^, etc.) that appears around the app
    icon. The app icon moves in the direction you have
    chosen.

    4.

    After you have placed the app icon where you want,
    press the E button.

    5.

    When you return to the Apps screen, the app will be
    positioned in the location you had selected.

    Edit My Apps
    Edit My Apps lets you add apps to and delete apps from
    My Apps. It also lets you change the position of an app in
    My Apps.

    Add an App to My Apps
    1.

    On the More Apps screen, use the ▲► buttons to
    go to Options at the top of the screen, and then
    press the E button.

    2.

    Select Edit My Apps, and then press the E
    button. The Edit My Apps screen appears.

    3.

    Select a full colour app from the top row of apps,
    and then press the E button. The full colour app
    icon appears in the My Apps area below and the
    app icon in the top row is grayed out.

    | NOTES |

    Create Folder
    Create Folder lets you create a folder on the More Apps
    screen into which you can put apps.
    1.

    On the More Apps screen, use the ▲► buttons to
    go to Options at the top of the screen, and then
    press the E button.

    2.

    Select Create Folder, and then press the E
    button. The Set Folder Name pop-up appears.

    3.

    Press the E button. The keyboard appears.

    4.

    Select the Clear button on the right side, and then
    press the E button to remove Folder 1 from the
    entry field. Then, using the keyboard, enter the
    name you want to apply to the folder.

    5.

    When finished, select the Done button on the right
    side, and then press the E button. The pop-up
    reappears.

    6.

    Select OK, and then press the E button. The new
    folder appears in the list of apps on the left side of
    the screen.

    \ Grayed out apps are already in My Apps.
    4.

    When you return to the Apps screen, the app will
    appear in the My Apps area.

    | 46 English



  • Page 47

    6.

    Select OK, and then press the E button. The
    folder is renamed.

    Move to Folder lets you move apps to the folder of your
    choice.

    7.

    Select Close on the right side of the screen, and
    then press the E button.

    On the More Apps screen, use the ▲► buttons to
    go to Options at the top of the screen, and then
    press the E button.

    2.

    Select Move to Folder, and then press the E
    button. The Move to Folder screen appears.

    3.

    Use the ▲▼◄► buttons to move to an app, and
    then press the E button to select the app. A
    check appears in the upper left corner of the app.

    4.

    To deselect an app, press the E button. The
    check disappears.

    5.

    Repeat Step 3 to select additional apps.

    Delete
    Delete lets you delete apps and folders from the My
    Apps screen. If there are apps in a folder, both the folder
    and the apps are deleted together. Delete removes apps
    permanently. If you decide you want to use an app you
    deleted, you will need to download it again.
    1.

    On the More Apps screen, use the ▲► buttons to
    go to Options at the top of the screen, and then
    press the E button.

    2.

    Select Delete, and then press the E button. The
    Delete screen appears.

    \ To select all the downloaded apps, select Select All

    3.

    at the top right of the screen, and then press the E
    button. To deselect all the apps, select Deselect All
    at the top right of the screen, and then press the E
    button.
    6. When done, select Select folder at the top of the
    screen, and then press the E button. The Select
    Folder pop-up appears.

    Use the ▲▼◄► buttons to move to an app, or
    folder and then press the E button to select. A
    check appears in the upper left corner of the app or
    folder you selected.

    4.

    To deselect an app, press the E button. The
    check disappears.

    5.

    Repeat Step 3 to select additional apps or folders.

    | NOTES |

    7.

    In the Select Folder pop-up, use the ▲▼ buttons
    to select the folder you want to move the apps you
    selected to, and then press the E button.

    8.

    The Apps Moved pop up appears. Press the E
    button.

    9.

    To open the folder, use the ▲▼◄► buttons to
    highlight the folder, and then press the E button.

    Rename Folder

    | NOTES |

    \ To select all the downloaded apps, select Select All
    at the top right of the screen, and then press the E
    button. To deselect all the apps, select Deselect All
    at the top right of the screen, and then press the E
    button.
    6. After you have made all your selections, select
    Delete at the top of the screen, and then press the
    E button. The deleting pop-up appears.
    7.

    Rename Folder lets you rename an existing folder.
    1.

    On the More Apps screen, use the ▲► buttons to
    go to Options at the top of the screen, and then
    press the E button.

    2.

    Select Rename Folder, and then press the E
    button. The Rename Folder screen appears, and a
    folder is highlighted.

    3.

    User the ▲▼◄► buttons to highlight a folder of
    your choice, and then press the E button. The
    Rename pop-up appears.

    4.

    Press the E button. The keyboard appears.

    5.

    Enter the new name for the folder. When finished,
    select Done on the right side, and then press
    the E button. The Rename popup reappears
    displaying the new name.

    Select Yes, and then press the E button. All the
    apps you selected are deleted.

    | NOTES |

    \ You cannot immediately delete a locked app or
    folder. If you select a locked app or folder to delete,
    when you perform Step 7, the Lock Service pop-up
    appears. Enter the Security PIN into the pop-up, and
    then press the E button. The lock will be released
    and the app or folder will be deleted.

    Update Apps
    Update Apps automatically searches the Internet for
    updated versions of the apps you have downloaded and
    updates them if it finds newer versions.
    1.

    On the More Apps screen, use the ▲► buttons to
    go to Options at the top of the screen, and then
    press the E button.

    English

    47 |

    Network Services

    1.

    06

    Move to Folder



  • Page 48

    Network Services
    2.

    Select Update Apps, and then press the E
    button.

    3.

    The unit searches the Internet for newer versions of
    your apps. If there are new apps, the Update Apps
    pop-up appears.

    4.

    To download the update for a particular app,
    highlight the app, and then press the E button.
    A check appears to the left of the app.

    5.

    To deselect the app, highlight it, and then press the
    E button.

    \ Bluetooth transmissions can interfere with the Screen
    Mirroring signal. Before using the Screen Mirroring
    function, we strongly recommend that you turn off
    the Bluetooth function on your smart phone or smart
    device.

    Using the Web Browser

    | NOTES |

    You can access the Internet using the Web Browser
    application.
    Select Web Browser on the Home screen, and then
    press the E button.

    \ To select all the updates, select Select All on the

    | NOTES |

    right of the pop-up, and then press the E button. To
    deselect all the updates, select Deselect All, and then
    press the E button.
    6. After you have selected the updates you want to
    download, select Update on the right side of the
    pop-up, and then press the E button.
    7.

    The unit downloads the updates you have chosen.
    A download bar appears in each app icon as the
    update for that app is downloaded. The download
    is complete when the download bars disappear.

    Screen Mirroring
    The Screen Mirroring function lets you view the screen
    of your smart phone or smart device on the TV you have
    connected to the home cinema system.
    1.

    With the Blu-ray's Home screen displayed, press
    the BLUE (D) button on the remote. The Screen
    Mirroring pop-up appears.

    2.

    Launch AllShare Cast on your device.

    3.

    On your device, find the name of the home cinema
    system in the list of available devices and then
    select it.

    4.

    The TV displays a connecting message (for
    example, Connecting to Android_92gb...) and then
    displays the connected message.

    5.

    In a few moments, the screen of your device
    appears on the TV screen.

    \ When you run the Web Browser with the product

    \
    \
    \
    \
    \

    Link Browsing and Pointer Browsing
    The Web Browser provides two types of browsing,
    Pointer Browsing and Link Browsing. When you launch
    the browser for the first time, Pointer Browsing is active.
    If you are using a mouse to navigate in the Web Browser,
    we recommend leaving Pointer Browsing active. If you
    are using your remote to navigate in the Web Browser,
    we recommend that you replace Pointer Browsing with
    Link Browsing. Link Browsing moves a highlight from one
    link to the next in the Web Browser and is much faster
    than Pointer Browsing if you are using your remote.
    To activate Link Browsing, follow these steps:
    1.

    Use the ▲▼◄► buttons on your remote to move
    the pointer to the Link Browser icon on the top right
    of the screen. The Link Browser icon is the third
    icon from the right.
    The pointer will be in the correct position if the icon
    turns blue and the words “Link Browsing” appear
    on the screen.

    2.

    Press the E button. Link Browsing is activated
    and will remain active whenever you bring up the
    Web Browser.

    | NOTES |

    \ When you are using the Screen Mirroring function,
    video stuttering or audio dropouts may occur,
    depending on your environment.
    \ You can connect to a device that supports AllShare
    Cast. Note that connecting to such a device may not
    be fully supported depending on the manufacturer.
    For further information on mobile connection support,
    refer to the manufacturer’s web site.

    | 48 English

    connected by HDMI to a BD Wise compatible TV and BD Wise is on - the browser is maximized to fill
    the screen and the TV's resolution is set to the optimal
    resolution automatically.
    The Web Browser is not compatible with Java
    applications.
    If you attempt to download a file, and the file cannot
    be saved, an error message will appear.
    E-commerce (purchasing products online) is not
    supported.
    ActiveX is not supported.
    Access may be blocked to some websites or to web
    browsers operated by certain businesses.



  • Page 49

    When you click the http://www.samsung.com
    , the
    or access a data or text entry field, and
    then press the E button, the keyboard pop-up appears.
    http://www.samsung.com

    100%

    1
    http://www.samsung.com

    100%

    As you enter characters, recommended text will be shown.

    Caps

    123#&

    1

    2

    3

    4

    5

    6

    7

    8

    9

    0

    q

    w

    e

    r

    t

    y

    u

    i

    o

    p

    ^

    *



    a

    s

    d

    f

    g

    h

    j

    k

    l

    ~

    @

    !

    Done

    z

    x

    c

    v

    b

    n

    m

    ,

    Cancel

    ENG

    www. .com

    Clear

    .

    ?

    -



    /



    4



    To use the keyboard pop-up with your remote, follow
    these steps:









    1











    : Moves to the previous page.
    : Moves to the next web page.
    : Displays the Bookmarks and History
    screen. You can bookmark the current page,
    select an existing bookmark, and edit and
    delete bookmarks. You can also view your
    browsing history and select a page to revisit.
    : Moves to the Home screen of the Web
    Browser.
    http://www.samsung.com
    : Lets you enter a
    page address manually using the keyboard
    pop-up.
    : Reloads the current page so that it is
    refreshed on the screen.
    : Adds the current page to your
    bookmarks.
    : Lets you search for
    information by entering words or characters
    using the keyboard pop-up. See Using the
    Keyboard Popup on this page.
    100% : Lets you enlarge or shrink the
    screen by various percentages.
    : Turns on the PIP function.
    : Lets you switch between Pointer
    Browsing and Link Browsing.
    : Lets you configure the Browser’s
    settings. See Using the Setting Menu on
    page 50.
    : Closes the Web Browser.

    1.

    Use the ▲▼◄► buttons on your remote to move
    the highlight to a letter or number of your choice.

    2.

    Press the E button to enter the letter or number
    into the entry field.

    3.

    To access capital letters, move the highlight to the
    Caps key on the top left, and then press the E
    button. Press the E button again with the Caps
    key highlighted to access small letters again.

    4.

    To access symbols and additional punctuation
    marks, highlight the 123#& button on the left, and
    then press the E button.

    5.

    To delete a character you entered, move the
    highlight to the button, and then press the E
    button.

    6.

    To delete all the characters you entered, move the
    highlight to the Clear button, and then press the
    E button.

    7.

    When finished entering, move the highlight to the
    Done button, and then press the E button.

    | NOTES |

    \ If you have a wireless keyboard connected to your
    product, you can use the wireless keyboard to enter
    letters, numbers, symbols, and punctuation. Note
    that the wireless keyboard will work only when the
    keyboard popup appears and can only be used to
    enter letters, numbers, symbols, and punctuation.

    English

    49 |

    Network Services

    Using the Keyboard Pop-up

    The Control Panel, which runs across the top of the
    screen, has a series of icons which start a number of
    useful functions. The icons are described below, starting
    with the icon on the far left of the screen.

    06

    The Control Panel at a Glance



  • Page 50

    Network Services
    Options on the Keyboard Pop-Up

    Approved
    Sites

    Lets you restrict your children’s
    access to inappropriate web pages
    by allowing access only to the web
    sites you have registered.
    Every time you access Approved
    Sites, the PIN screen appears. The
    first time you access Approved
    Sites, enter the default PIN, 0000
    using the number buttons on your
    remote.
    You can change the PIN using the
    Reset password for the Approved
    Sites function. See below.
     Approved Sites feature : Turns
    the Approved Sites function on
    or off.
     Reset password for Approved
    Sites : Change the Approved
    Sites password.
     Add current site : Lets you add
    the currently displayed web site
    to the Approved Sites list.
     Manage Approved Sites : Lets
    you key in URLs to add to the
    Approved Sites List and delete
    sites from the Approved Sites
    list. If you turn Approved Sites
    on and have not added any sites
    to the Approved Sites list, you
    will not be able to access any
    Internet sites.

    Private
    browsing
    on/off

    Enable or disable the Privacy mode.
    When the Privacy mode is enabled,
    the browser does not retain the
    URLs of sites you visit. If you want
    to enable Privacy mode, select OK.
    If the Privacy mode is running, the
    “Stop” icon appears in front of
    the URL at the top of the screen.
    To disable Privacy mode, select
    it again when Privacy mode is
    enabled.

    To access the keyboard pop-up options, highlight the
    button on the bottom left of the keyboard, and then press
    the E button.

    Language

    Select the language for the
    keyboard. You can select English,
    French, Russian, etc.

    Recommended
    Text

    The keyboard will suggest
    recommended words as you enter
    text. You can turn this function On
    or Off.

    Predict Next
    Letter

    The keyboard will predict the next
    letter as you enter letters. The
    predictions appear in a ring around
    the letter you have just entered.
    You can select a predicted letter or
    move to another letter. You can turn
    this function On or Off.

    Using the Setting Menu
    The Setting menu contains functions that control how
    the Browser operates and Browser security functions.
    icon in the
    To open the Setting menu, highlight the
    Control Panel, and then press the E button. To select
    an option in the setting menu, highlight the option, and
    then press the E button.
    http://www.samsung.com

    100%

    Enable Grabbing
    Approved Sites
    Private browsing on
    Web Browser Settings
    Help

    Close

    Enable/
    Disable
    Grabbing

    | 50 English

    Turns the Grabber function On and
    Off. When the Grabber function is
    on, you can move a web page up
    and down without dragging the
    scroll bar.
    The Grabber function is only
    available in Pointer Browsing.



  • Page 51

    Provides basic information about
    the operation of the Web Browser.

    | NOTES |

    On the Link Service Accounts screen, select the
    service you want to link to the product, and then
    press the E button.

    5.

    Select Register, and then press the E button.

    6.

    In the ID and Password screen, enter the ID you use
    to log in to the service you selected using the popup keyboard. When finished, select Done, and then
    press the E button.

    7.

    Repeat the same process for the password. When
    finished select Done, and then press the E
    button.

    8.

    Select OK, and then press the E button.

    BD-LIVE™
    Once the product is connected to your network, you can
    enjoy various movie-related service contents available on
    BD-LIVE compliant discs.
    1.

    Attach a USB flash drive to the USB jack on the
    front of the product, and then check its remaining
    memory. The memory device must have at least
    1GB of free space to accommodate the BD-LIVE
    services.

    2.

    Select Settings on the Home screen, and then
    press the E button.

    3.

    Select Network, and then press the E button.

    4.

    Select BD-Live Settings, and then press the E
    button.

    5.

    Select BD Data Management, and then press the
    E button.

    6.

    Select Select Device, and then press the E
    button.

    \ Depending on the web site, some of the Web Browser
    Setting functions may not be activated. Functions that
    are not activated are greyed out and cannot be used.

    Linking your Internet Service
    Accounts to the Product
    The Link Service Accounts function lets you link your
    product to your accounts with Internet services that the
    product can log you in to the service automatically when
    you start the app for that service.
    To create a service account link, follow these steps:
    1.

    On the Home screen, press the RED (A) button on
    your remote to log in to your Samsung Account.

    2.

    After you have logged in, press the RED (A) button
    on your remote again.

    3.

    Select Link Service Accounts in the My Account
    pop-up, and then press the E button.

    7.

    Select USB device, and then press the E button.

    8.

    Insert a Blu-ray Disc that supports BD-LIVE.

    9.

    Select an item from the list of BD-LIVE service
    contents provided by the disc manufacturer.

    | NOTES |

    \ The way you use BD-LIVE and the provided contents
    may differ, depending on the disc manufacturer.

    English

    51 |

    Network Services

    Help

    4.

    06

    Web Browser
    Settings

     Set as homepage : You can set
    the Browser's home page.
     Pop-up Block : Turns the Popup
    Block on and off.
     Ad Block : You can determine
    whether to block advertisements
    and select the URLs for which
    advertisements are blocked.
     General : You can delete
    personal in information such as
    website history and browsing
    data (cookies, etc.), and reset
    all web browser settings to their
    factory defaults.
     Encoding : You can set the
    Encoding setting for web pages
    to Automatic or select the
    encoding format manually from a
    list.
     Pointer : You can set the speed
    of the cursor when the cursor
    is set to Pointer and turn Smart
    Cursor On and Off.
     Browser Information : Displays
    the version number and copyright
    information for the Web Browser.



  • Page 52

    Appendix
    Additional Information
    Notes
    Connections
    HDMI OUT
    • Certain HDMI output resolutions may not work,
    depending on your TV.
    • You must have a HDMI connection to enjoy videos
    with 3D technology.
    • A long HDMI cable may cause screen noise. If this
    occurs, set HDMI Deep Colour to Off in the menu.
    Settings
    3D Settings
    • For some 3D discs, to stop a movie during 3D
    playback, press the 5 button once. The movie
    stops and the 3D mode option is de-activated.
    To change a 3D option selection when you are
    playing a 3D movie, press the 5 button once. The
    Blu-ray menu appears. Press the 5 button again,
    then select 3D Settings in the Blu-ray menu.
    • Depending on the content and the position of the
    picture on your TV screen, you may see vertical
    black bars on the left side, right side, or both sides.
    TV Aspect Ratio
    • Depending on the disc type, some aspect ratios
    may not be available.
    • If you select an aspect ratio and option which is
    different than the aspect ratio of your TV screen,
    then the picture might appear to be distorted.
    • If you select 16:9 Original, your TV may display 4:3
    Pillarbox (black bars on sides of picture).
    BD Wise (Samsung Products only)
    • When BD Wise is on, the Resolution setting
    automatically defaults to BD Wise and BD Wise
    appears in the Resolution menu.
    • If the product is connected to a device that does
    not support BD Wise, you can not use the BD Wise
    function.
    • For proper operation of BD Wise, set the BD Wise
    option in both the product and the TV to On.

    | 52 English

    Digital Output
    • Be sure to select the correct Digital Output or you
    will hear no sound or just loud noise.
    • If the HDMI device (AV receiver, TV) is not
    compatible with compressed formats (Dolby Digital,
    DTS), the audio signal outputs as PCM.
    • Regular DVDs do not have BONUSVIEW audio and
    Navigation Sound Effects.
    • Some Blu-ray Discs do not have BONUSVIEW
    audio and Navigation Sound Effects.
    • This Digital Output setup does not affect the
    analogue (L/R) audio or HDMI audio output to your
    TV.
    It affects the optical and HDMI audio output when
    your product is connected to an AV receiver.
    • If you play MPEG audio soundtracks, the audio
    signal outputs as PCM regardless of your Digital
    Output selections (PCM or Bitstream).
    • Digital Output can be activated when Speaker
    Selection is set to TV Speaker.
    BD-Live Internet Connection
    • The Internet connection may be restricted while you
    are using BD-LIVE contents.
    Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC)
    • Depending on your TV, certain HDMI output
    resolutions may not work. Please refer to the user
    manual of your TV.
    • This function is not available if the HDMI cable does
    not support CEC.
    • If your Samsung TV has an Anynet+ logo, then it
    supports the Anynet+ function.
    BD Data Management
    • In the external memory mode, disc playback may
    be stopped if you disconnect the USB device in the
    middle of playback.
    • Only those USB devices formatted in the FAT file
    system (DOS 8.3 volume label) are supported.
    We recommend you use USB devices that support
    USB 2.0 protocol with 4 MB/sec or faster read/write
    speed.
    • The Resume Play function may not work after you
    format the storage device.
    • The total memory available to BD Data Management
    may differ, depending on the conditions.



  • Page 53

    • For more information about DivX(R) VOD, visit
    “http://vod.divx.com”.

    • The ◄► indicator will not appear on the screen
    if the BONUSVIEW section does not contain any
    BONUSVIEW audio settings.
    • The languages available through the Audio
    Language function depend on the languages that
    are encoded on the disc. This function or certain
    languages may not be available.
    • Some Blu-ray Discs may allow you to select either
    the PCM or Dolby Digital audio soundtrack in
    English.

    Front Display
    • You cannot change the brightness of the
    and the VOL +, - button.

    button

    Speaker Settings
    • When Speaker Selection is set to TV Speaker,
    audio is produced through the TV speakers.
    • Running the Auto Sound Calibration function takes
    about 3 minutes.
    • Make sure there is no disc in the product when you
    run the Auto Sound Calibration function.
    • If the ASC microphone is disconnected during the
    Auto Sound Calibration setup, the setup will be
    cancelled.
    • When the Auto Sound Calibration function is
    activated, the DSP, Dolby Pro Logic ll and SFE
    Mode will not work.
    • If the product is connected to external devices or
    other components (such as an AUX, D. IN), the Auto
    Sound Calibration Setup may not work properly.
    HDMI audio
    • When HDMI audio is output to the TV speakers, it is
    automatically down-mixed to 2 channels.
    Audio Return Channel
    • When Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) is Off, the Audio Return
    Channel function is not available.
    • Using an HDMI cable not certified for ARC (Audio
    Return Channel) may cause a compatibility problem.
    • The ARC function is only available if an ARCcompliant TV is connected.
    Playback

    Selecting the Subtitle Language
    • Depending on the Blu-ray Disc / DVD, you may be
    able to change the subtitle language in the Disc
    Menu. Press the DISC MENU button.
    • This function depends on the selection of subtitles
    that are encoded on the disc and may not be
    available on all Blu-ray Discs/DVDs.
    • Information about the main feature BONUSVIEW
    mode will also appear if the Blu-ray Disc has a
    BONUSVIEW section.
    • This function changes both the primary and
    secondary subtitles at the same time.
    • The total number of primary and secondary subtitles
    are displayed respectively.
    Playing JPEG files
    • You can’t enlarge the subtitle and PG graphic in the
    full screen mode.
    Media Play
    Dolby Pro Logic II Mode
    • Before selecting Dolby Pro Logic II mode, connect
    your external device to the AUDIO INPUT jacks (L
    and R) on the product. If you connect to only one
    of the inputs (L or R), you cannot listen to surround
    sound.

    Playing Video files

    Using the TOOLS button while playing pictures

    • Video files with high bit rates of 20Mbps or more
    strain the product’s capabilities and may stop
    playing during playback.

    • If the system is connected to a BD Wise compliant
    TV that has set BD Wise to On, the Picture Settings
    menu will not appear.
    • The Background Music function will not work unless
    the music file and the photo file are located on the
    same storage media. Also, sound quality can be
    impacted by the bit rate of the MP3 music file, the
    size of the photos, and the encoding method.

    English

    53 |

    Appendix

    Selecting the Audio Language
    07

    DivX® Video On Demand



  • Page 54

    Appendix
    Digital Output Selection
    Setup

    PCM

    Connection

    Audio
    Stream on
    Blu-ray Disc

    Audio
    Stream on
    DVD

    Definition for
    Blu-ray Disc

    Bitstream
    (Unprocessed)

    Bitstream
    (Re-encoded DTS)

    Bitstream
    (Re-encoded
    Dolby D)

    HDMI supported AV receiver

    PCM

    Up to PCM 7.1ch

    PCM

    DTS re-encoded

    Re-encoded
    Dolby Digital *

    Dolby Digital

    Up to PCM 5.1ch

    Dolby Digital

    DTS re-encoded

    Re-encoded
    Dolby Digital *

    Dolby Digital
    Plus

    Up to PCM 7.1ch

    Dolby Digital Plus

    DTS re-encoded

    Re-encoded
    Dolby Digital *

    Dolby
    TrueHD

    Up to PCM 7.1ch

    Dolby TrueHD

    DTS re-encoded

    Re-encoded
    Dolby Digital *

    DTS

    Up to PCM 7.1ch

    DTS

    DTS re-encoded

    Re-encoded
    Dolby Digital *

    DTSHD High
    Resolution
    Audio

    Up to PCM 7.1ch

    DTS-HD High
    Resolution Audio

    DTS re-encoded

    Re-encoded
    Dolby Digital *

    DTS-HD
    Master
    Audio

    Up to PCM 7.1ch

    DTS-HD Master
    Audio

    DTS re-encoded

    Re-encoded
    Dolby Digital *

    PCM

    PCM 2ch

    PCM 2ch

    PCM 2ch

    PCM 2ch

    Dolby Digital

    Up to PCM 5.1ch

    Dolby Digital

    Dolby Digital

    Dolby Digital

    DTS

    Up to PCM 7.1ch

    DTS

    DTS

    DTS

    Any

    Decodes the main
    Outputs only the
    Decodes the main
    feature audio and
    main feature audio
    feature audio and
    Decodes the main
    BONUSVIEW audio
    stream so that your BONUSVIEW audio
    feature audio and
    stream together
    AV receiver can
    stream together
    BONUSVIEW audio
    into PCM audio and
    decode the audio
    into PCM audio and
    stream together
    adds Navigation
    bitstream.
    adds Navigation
    into PCM audio and
    Sound Effects, then
    You will not hear
    Sound Effects, then
    adds Navigation
    re-encodes the PCM
    BONUSVIEW audio
    re-encodes the
    Sound Effects.
    audio into Dolby
    or Navigation Sound PCM audio into DTS
    Digital bitstream or
    Effects.
    bitstream.
    PCM.

     If the Source Stream is 2ch or mono, “Re-encoded Dolby D” Setting are not applied. Output will be PCM 2ch.
    Blu-ray Discs may include three audio streams :
    - Main Feature Audio : The audio soundtrack of the main feature.
    - BONUSVIEW audio : An additional soundtrack such as the director or actor’s commentary.
    - Navigation Sound Effects : When you choose some menu navigation, Navigation Sound Effects may sound.
    Navigation Sound Effects are different on each Blu-ray Disc.

    | 54 English



  • Page 55

    Resolution according to the contents type
    E-contents/
    Digital contents

    Resolution of Blu-ray Disc

    1080p@60F

    4K Output : Auto

    2160p@24F

    2160p@24F

    4K Output : Off

    1080p@24F

    1080p@24F

    Appendix

    BD Wise

    Blu-ray Disc

    07

    Contents Type
    Setup

    Movie Frame : Auto
    Auto

    Max. Resolution of TV input

    Max. Resolution of TV input

    Movie Frame : Auto (24Fs)
     1080p & 1080i only

    Movie Frame : Off

    1080p@24F

    1080p@24F

    1080p

    1080p@60F

    1080p@60F

    1080i

    1080i

    1080i

    720p

    720p

    720p

    576p/480p

    576p/480p

    576p/480p

    Contents Type
    Setup
    BD Wise

    DVD
    480i

    4K Output : Auto

    2160p@24F

    4K Output : Off

    1080p@24F

    DVD 24fps Conversion : Auto
    Movie Frame : Auto
    Auto
    DVD 24fps Conversion : Off
    Movie Frame : Off

    Max. Resolution of TV input
    Max. Resolution of TV input

    Movie Frame : Auto (DVD 24fps Conversion : Auto)
     1080p & 1080i only

    1080p@24F

    1080p

    1080p@60F

    1080i

    1080i

    720p

    720p

    576p/480p

    576p/480p

    | NOTES |

    \ If the TV you connected to the product does not support Movie Frame or the resolution you selected, the message

    \

    \
    \
    \

    "If no pictures are shown after selecting Yes, please wait for 15 seconds to return to the previous resolution. Do you
    want to change the resolution?" appears. If you select Yes, the TV's screen will go to blank for 15 seconds, and then
    the resolution will revert to the previous resolution automatically.
    If the screen stays blank after you have changed the resolution, remove all discs, and then press and hold the 5
    button on the top of the product for more than 5 seconds. All settings are restored to the factory default. Run the
    Initial Settings procedure again. Then, go to Settings > Display > Resolution in the Menu, and select the correct
    resolution for your TV.
    When you run the Initial Settings procedure, re-select the language and aspect ratio (screen size and format) only.
    Resetting does not affect your network settings, so you should be able to skip Network Setup and Software Update.
    When the factory default settings are restored, all stored user BD data will be deleted.
    The Blu-ray Disc must have the 24 frame feature for the product to use the Movie Frame (24Fs) mode.

    English

    55 |



  • Page 56

    Appendix
    Troubleshooting
    Refer to the table below when this product does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed
    below or if the instructions below do not help, turn off the product, disconnect the power cord and contact the nearest
    authorized dealer or Samsung Electronics Service Centre.
    Symptom

    Check/Remedy

    I cannot eject the disc.

    • Is the power cord plugged securely into the outlet?
    • Turn off the power and then turn it back on.

    Playback does not start.

    • Check the region number of the Blu-ray/DVD disc.
    Blu-ray/DVD disc purchased from abroad may not be playable.
    • CD-ROMs and DVD-ROMs cannot be played on this product.
    • Make sure that the rating level is correct.

    Playback does not start
    immediately when the
    Play/Pause button is
    pressed.

    • Are you using a deformed disc or a disc with scratches on the surface?
    • Wipe the disc clean.

    Sound is not produced.

    • The home cinema does not play sound during fast playback, slow playback,and
    step motion playback.
    • Are the speakers connected properly? Is the speaker setup correctly customized?
    • Is the disc severely damaged?

    Sound can be heard only
    from a few speakers and
    not all 8.






    Dolby Digital 7.1 CH
    Surround Sound is not
    produced.

    • Is there "Dolby Digital 7.1 CH" mark on the disc? Dolby Digital 7.1 CH Surround
    Sound is produced only if the disc is recorded with 7.1 channel sound.
    • Is the audio language correctly set to Dolby Digital 7.1-CH in the information
    display?

    The remote control does
    not work.

    • Are you operating the remote within its operational range and within the proper
    angle relative to the sensor?
    • Are the batteries drained?
    • Have you selected the mode (TV/BD) functions of the remote control (TV or BD)
    correctly?

    • The disc is rotating but
    no picture is produced.
    • Picture quality is poor
    and the picture is
    shaking.






    Audio language and
    subtitles do not work.

    • Audio language and subtitles will not work if the disc does not contain them.

    The menu screen does
    not appear even when the
    menu function is selected.

    • Are you using a disc that does not contain menus?

    | 56 English

    On certain Blu-ray/DVD discs, sound is output from the front speakers only.
    Check if the speakers are connected properly.
    Adjust the volume.
    When listening to a CD, radio or TV, sound is output to the front speakers only.

    Is the TV power on?
    Are the video cables connected properly?
    Is the disc dirty or damaged?
    A poorly manufactured disc may not be playable.



  • Page 57

    The aspect ratio cannot be
    changed.

    • You can play 16:9 Blu-ray/DVD discs in 16:9 Full mode, 4:3 Letter Box mode, or
    4:3 Pan-Scan mode, but 4:3 Blu-ray/DVD discs are played in 4:3 ratio only. Refer
    to the Blu-ray Disc jacket and then select the appropriate function.

    • The product is not
    working.
    (Example: The power
    goes out or a strange
    noise is heard.)
    • The Product is not working
    normally.

    • Press and hold the remote control's 5 button for 5 seconds in STANDBY mode.
    - Using the RESET function will erase all stored settings.
    Do not use this unless necessary.

    You have forgotten the
    rating level password.

    • With no disc in the product, press and hold the product's 5 button for longer
    than 5 seconds. INIT appears on the display and all settings will return to the
    default values.
    Then, press the POWER button.
    - Using the RESET function will erase all stored settings.
    Do not use this unless necessary.

    Can't receive radio
    broadcasts.

    • Is the antenna connected properly?
    • If the antenna's input signal is weak, install an external FM antenna in an area with
    good reception.

    While listening to TV audio
    through the Product, no
    sound is heard.

    • If the OPEN/CLOSE ^ button is pressed while listening to TV audio using the
    D. IN or AUX functions, the Blu-ray/DVD disc functions are turned on and the TV
    audio is muted.

    "Not Available" appears on
    screen.

    • The features or action cannot be completed at this time because:
    1. The Blu-ray/DVD disc's software restricts it.
    2. The Blu-ray/DVD disc's software doesn’t support the feature (e.g., angles)
    3. The feature is not available at the moment.
    4. You’ve requested a title or chapter number or search time that is out of range.

    If the HDMI output is set to
    a resolution your TV cannot
    support (for example,
    1080p), you may not see a
    picture on your TV.

    • Press and hold the 5 button on front panel for more than 5 seconds with no disc
    in the product. All settings will revert to the factory settings.

    No HDMI output.

    • Check the connection between the TV and the HDMI jack of the product.
    • Check if your TV supports 576p/480p/720p/1080i/1080p HDMI input resolution.

    Abnormal HDMI output
    screen.

    • If random noise appears on the screen, it means that TV does not support HDCP
    (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection).

    English

    57 |

    Appendix

    Check/Remedy
    07

    Symptom



  • Page 58

    Appendix
    Symptom

    Check/Remedy

    AllShare function
    I can see folders shared
    through AllShare, but I
    cannot see the files.

    • AllShare only shows Video, Photo, and Music files. Other types of files are not
    displayed.

    Video is played
    intermittently.

    • Check if the network is stable.
    • Check if the network cable is properly connected and if the network is not
    overloaded.
    • The wireless connection between the DLNA compatible device and the product is
    unstable.
    Check the connection.

    The AllShare connection
    between the product and
    PC is unstable.

    • IP address under the same subnetwork should be unique, otherwise IP collision can
    results in such a phenomenon.
    • Check if you have a firewall enabled.
    If so, disable the firewall function.

    BD-LIVE
    I cannot connect to the
    BD-LIVE server.

    • Test whether the network connection is active by using the Network Status
    function.
    • Check whether a USB memory device is connected to the product.
    • The memory device must have at least 1GB of free space to accommodate the
    BD-LIVE service.
    You can check the available size in BD Data Management. (See page 52)
    • See if the BD-LIVE Internet Connection option is set to Allow(All).
    • If all above fails, contact the contents provider or update to the latest firmware.

    When using the BD-LIVE
    service, an error occurs.

    • The memory device must have at least 1GB of free space to accommodate the
    BD-LIVE service.
    You can check the available size in BD Data Management. (See page 52)

    | NOTES |

    \ When the factory default settings are restored, all stored user BD data will be deleted.

    | 58 English



  • Page 59

    Specifications
    07

    Weight

    3.30 kg
    430.00 (W) x 55.00 (H) x 314.50 (D) mm

    Operating Temperature Range

    +5°C to +35°C

    Operating Humidity Range

    10 % to 75 %

    Signal/noise ratio

    55 dB

    Usable sensitivity

    12 dB

    Total harmonic distortion

    0.5 %

    Video

    2D : 2160p, 1080p, 1080i, 720p, 576p/480p
    3D : 1080p, 720p

    Audio

    PCM multichannel audio, Bitstream audio, PCM audio

    Front speaker output

    165W x 2(3—)

    Front Top speaker output

    165W x 2(3—)

    Centre speaker output

    170W(3—)

    Surround speaker output

    165W x 2(3—)

    Subwoofer speaker output

    170W(3—)

    Appendix

    Dimensions
    General

    FM Tuner

    HDMI

    Amplifier
    Analogue input : 20Hz~20kHz (±3dB)
    Frequency response
    Digital input : 20Hz~40kHz (±4dB)
    S/N Ratio

    70dB

    Channel separation

    60dB

    Input sensitivity

    (AUX)500mV

    English

    59 |



  • Page 60

    Appendix
    Speaker (7.1ch speaker system)
    Speaker
    system

    Impedance

    Frequency Output sound Rated
    range
    pressure level input

    Maximum
    input

    Front/
    Front Top
    140Hz~
    20kHz

    Surround

    165W
    87dB/W/M

    Centre
    Subwoofer






    170W
    88dB/W/M

    Weights
    (Unit : kg)

    90.0 x 1302.0 x 70.0
    (Stand base: 250 x 250)

    7.65

    90.0 x 1252.0 x 70.0
    (Stand base: 250 x 250)

    6.82

    360.0 x 70.0 x 65.9

    0.98

    205.6 x 390.6 x 350.6

    6.33

    330W

    3—

    40Hz ~
    160Hz

    Dimensions
    (W x H x D) (Unit : mm)

    340W

    Network speeds equal to or below 10Mbps are not supported.
    Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd reserves the right to change the specifications without notice.
    Weight and dimensions are approximate.
    Design and specifications are subject to change without prior notice.
    For the power supply and Power Consumption, refer to the label attached to the product.

    ❑ SWA-6000

    Weight

    1.1 kg

    Dimensions (W x H x D)

    76.2 x 228.6 x 152.4 mm

    Operating Temperature Range

    +5°C to +35°C

    Operating Humidity Range

    10 % to 75 %

    Output

    165W x 2 CH

    Frequency range

    20Hz~20KHz

    S/N Ratio

    65dB

    | 60 English



  • Page 61

    ‫‪HT-F9750W‬‬

    ‫™‪7.1CH Blu-ray‬‬
    ‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻓﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻲ‬
    ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬

    ‫ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺎﺕ ﻫﺎﺋﻠﺔ‬
    ‫ﺷﻜﺮﺍ ﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ‪.Samsung‬‬
    ‫ً‬
    ‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﺘﻜﺎﻣﻠﺔ‪،‬‬
    ‫ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ‬

    ‫‪www.samsung.com/register‬‬



  • Page 62

    ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ‬
    ‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬
    ‫ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء )ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ(‪.‬‬
    ‫ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺘﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻳُﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﻟﻤﻮﻇﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻫﻠﻴﻦ ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ‪.‬‬

    ‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
    ‫ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
    ‫ﻻ ﺗﻔﺘﺢ‬

    ‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺇﻟﻰ "ﺟﻬﺪ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺧﻄﻴﺮ"‬
    ‫ﺑﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻳﺸﻜﻞ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
    ‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬

    ‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‪ :‬ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺳﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ‬
    ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺳﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺧﻠﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬

    ‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬

    ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪1‬‬
    ‫‪KLASSE 1‬‬
    ‫‪LUOKAN 1‬‬
    ‫‪KLASS 1‬‬
    ‫‪PRODUCTO‬‬

    ‫• ﻟﻠﺤﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻄﺮ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ‬
    ‫ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬

    ‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
    ‫•‬
    ‫•‬
    ‫•‬
    ‫•‬

    ‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻟﻠﺮﺫﺍﺫ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺃﻱ ﺁﻧﻴﺔ‬
    ‫ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺳﻮﺍﺋﻞ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺁﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻫﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
    ‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻛﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﻭﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ‬
    ‫ً‬
    ‫ﺟﺎﻫﺰﺍ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
    ‫ﻳﻈﻞ‬
    ‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﻮﺻﻠﺔ ﺗﺄﺭﻳﺾ‬
    ‫ﻭﺍﻗﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
    ‫ﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
    ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﺟﺎﻫﺰ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬

    ‫|‪2‬‬

    ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬

    ‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻤﺔ‬
    ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬

    ‫ﻣﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻴﺰﺭ‬
    ‫‪LASER PRODUKT‬‬
    ‫‪LASER LAITE‬‬
    ‫‪LASER APPARAT‬‬
    ‫‪LÁSER CLASE 1‬‬

    ‫ﻣﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻴﺰﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪1‬‬
    ‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻣﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻴﺰﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪.1‬‬
    ‫ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺇﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺗﻠﻚ‬
    ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺒﻴﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻹﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺧﻄﻴﺮ‪.‬‬

    ‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
    ‫• ﻳﻨﺒﻌﺚ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﻟﻴﺰﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﺋﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻭﻓﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺸﻴﻘﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﺘﺠﻨﺐ‬
    ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﺸﻌﺎﻉ‪.‬‬



  • Page 63

    ‫ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻭﺇﺩﺍﺭﺗﻪ‬

    ‫•‬
    ‫•‬

    ‫•‬
    ‫•‬

    ‫•‬

    ‫‪01‬‬

    ‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ‬
    ‫ﻻ ﺗُﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻄﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺍﺋﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﺫﺍﺫ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ ﺁﻧﻴﺔ‬
    ‫ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻮﺍﺋﻞ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺁﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻫﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
    ‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺳﺤﺐ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ‬
    ‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ‬
    ‫ﻭﻳﺴﺮ ﻃﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
    ‫ﻻ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺄﻳ ٍﺪ ﻣﺒﺘﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
    ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
    ‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺣﺎﺋﻂ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪.‬‬
    ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺨﻮﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ‬
    ‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪.‬‬
    ‫ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺰﺍﻧﺔ‬
    ‫ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬‫ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻓﺠﺄﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺭﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﻓﺊ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﻜﺜﻒ‬‫ﺑﺨﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ‬
    ‫ﺧﻠﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺳﺎﻋﺘﻴﻦ ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ‬
    ‫ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﺛﻢ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
    ‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬

    ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ‬

    ‫• ﻣﺴﻚ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ‬
    ‫ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻘﻠﻞ ﺑﺼﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﺎﺑﻊ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻭﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ‬
    ‫ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻲ‪.‬‬
    ‫ ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬‫ ﺃﻣﺴﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﻑ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻻ ﺗﻨﻄﺒﻊ ﺑﺼﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﺎﺑﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺢ‪.‬‬
    ‫ ﻻ ﺗﻠﺼﻖ ﻭﺭﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬‫• ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ‬
    ‫ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﺟﺪﺕ ﺑﺼﻤﺎﺕ ﺃﺻﺎﺑﻊ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪،‬‬‫ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻈﻴﻔﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻨﻈﻒ ﻟﻄﻴﻒ ﻣﺨﻔﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺎء‬
    ‫ﻭﺍﻣﺴﺤﻪ ﺑﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
    ‫ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺴﺢ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻪ‪.‬‬
    ‫ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬‫‪ ‬ﻻ ﺗﺤﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬
    ‫‪ ‬ﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﺭﺩﺓ ﺟﻴﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
    ‫‪ ‬ﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻏﻼﻑ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻧﻈﻴﻒ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ‪.‬‬

    ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺻﺪﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﺒﻌﺜﺖ ﺭﺍﺋﺤﺔ ﺍﺣﺘﺮﺍﻕ ﺃﻭ‬
    ‫ﺩﺧﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
    ‫ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ‪ .‬ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﺄﻗﺮﺏ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ‬
    ‫ﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻼء ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ‬
    ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬

    ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺧﻴﺺ‬
    ‫ﻣﺼﻨﻌﺔ ﺑﺘﺮﺧﻴﺺ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ ‪Dolby‬‬
    ‫‪.Laboratories‬‬
    ‫‪ Dolby‬ﻭ‪ Pro Logic‬ﻭﺭﻣﺰ ‪D‬‬
    ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺩﻭﺝ ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻤﻌﺎﻣﻞ‬
    ‫‪.Dolby Laboratories‬‬

    ‫ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻊ ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺮﺍﻉ ﺍﻷﻣﺮﻳﻜﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ‪:‬‬
    ‫‪ 5,956,674‬ﻭ‪ 5,974,380‬ﻭ‪ 5,978,762‬ﻭ‪6,487,535‬‬
    ‫ﻭ‪ 6,226,616‬ﻭ‪ 7,212,872‬ﻭ‪ 7,003,467‬ﻭ‪7,272,567‬‬
    ‫ﻭ‪ 7,668,723‬ﻭ‪ 7,392,195‬ﻭ‪ 7,930,184‬ﻭ‪7,333,929‬‬
    ‫ﻭ‪ .7,548,853‬ﺇﻥ ‪ DTS‬ﻭ‪ DTS-HD‬ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻭ‪ DTS‬ﺃﻭ‬
    ‫‪ DTS-HD‬ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻣﻌًﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻭ‪DTS‬‬
    ‫‪ Neo:Fusion‬ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪ .DTS, Inc‬ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ‬
    ‫©‪ 2012‬ﻟﺼﺎﻟﺢ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪ .DTS, Inc‬ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻮﻕ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ‪.‬‬
    ‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ DivX® :DIVX‬ﻫﻮ‬
    ‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺅﻩ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ‬
    ‫‪ ،DivX, LLC‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ﺗﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬
    ‫ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪.Rovi Corporation‬‬
    ‫ﻭﻫﻮ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ®‪ DivX Certified‬ﺭﺳﻤﻲ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ .DivX‬ﺗﻔﻀﻞ‬
    ‫ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ‪ divx.com‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ‬
    ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺗﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪.DivX‬‬
    ‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ DIVX‬ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ‪ :‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪DivX‬‬
    ‫®‪ Certified‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ DivX‬ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ )‪(VOD‬‬
    ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺷﺮﺍﺅﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪DivX VOD‬‬
    ‫ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ‪ vod.divx.com‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ‬
    ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺇﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
    ‫ُ®‪ DivX Certified‬ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ®‪ DivX‬ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ﺗﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
    ‫‪ ،HD 1080p‬ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﺘﺎﺯﺓ‪.‬‬
    ‫ﺇﻥ ®‪ DivX‬ﻭ®‪ DivX Certified‬ﻭﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﻟﻬﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ‬
    ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪ Rovi Corporation‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬
    ‫ﻟﻬﺎ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ‪.‬‬
    ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻡ ﺑﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺮﺍﻉ ﺍﻷﻣﺮﻳﻜﻴﺔ‬
    ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪7,519,274 ;7,515,710 ;7,460,668 ;7,295,673 :‬‬

    ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪| 3‬‬



  • Page 64

    ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ‬
    ‫‪ HDMI‬ﻭ‪HDMI High-‬‬
    ‫‪Definition Multimedia‬‬
    ‫‪ Interface‬ﻭﺷﻌﺎﺭ ‪ HDMI‬ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
    ‫ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪ HDMI Licensing LLC‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ‬
    ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬

    ‫ﻭﺗﻌﺪ ‪ Oracle‬ﻭ‪ Java‬ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ‬
    ‫‪ Oracle‬ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻟﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء‬
    ‫ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻤﻠﻮﻛﺔ ﻷﺻﺤﺎﺑﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻨﻴﻴﻦ‪.‬‬

    ‫ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﺑﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺮﺍﻉ‬
    ‫ﺍﻷﻣﺮﻳﻜﻴﺔ ﻭﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻜﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪Rovi‬‬
    ‫‪ .Corporation‬ﻳُﺤﻈﺮ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻜﺴﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻚ‪.‬‬
    ‫ﺇﻥ ™‪ Blu-ray Disc‬ﻭ™‪ Blu-ray‬ﻭﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
    ‫ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪.Blu-ray Disc Association‬‬
    ‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ‪ Cinavia‬ﻟﻠﺤﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻏﻴﺮ‬
    ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻤﻮﺡ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
    ‫ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺟﻬﺎ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﻈﻮﺭ ﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﻤﻮﺡ ﺑﻬﺎ‪،‬‬
    ‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‪.‬‬
    ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ‪ Cinavia‬ﺑﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
    ‫ﻋﻤﻼء ‪ Cinavia‬ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ‪http://www.cinavia.‬‬
    ‫‪ .com‬ﻟﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ‪ Cinavia‬ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺃﺭﺳﻞ‬
    ‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺮﻳﺪﻳﺔ ﻣﺪﻭﻥ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ‪Cinavia :‬‬
    ‫‪Consumer Information Centre, P.O. Box 86851, San‬‬
    ‫‪".Diego, CA, 92138, USA‬‬
    ‫ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﻤﻠﻮﻛﺔ ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪Verance‬‬
    ‫‪ Corporation‬ﻭﻣﺤﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﺑﺮﺍءﺓ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺮﺍﻉ ﺍﻷﻣﺮﻳﻜﻴﺔ ﺭﻗﻢ‬
    ‫‪ 7,369,677‬ﻭﺑﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺮﺍﻉ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻷﻣﺮﻳﻜﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ‬
    ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﻭﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻷﻭﺟﻪ‬
    ‫ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻟﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﻌﺪ ‪ Cinavia‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪Verance‬‬
    ‫‪ .Corporation‬ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ‪ 2004-2010‬ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ‬
    ‫‪ .Verance Corporation‬ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻮﻕ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ‬
    ‫‪ .Verance‬ﻳُﺤﻈﺮ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻜﺴﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﻚ‪.‬‬
    ‫ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﻮﺡ‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺡ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ "ﺗﺮﺍﺧﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺩﺭ‬
    ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﻮﺣﺔ" ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬

    ‫|‪4‬‬

    ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬

    ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻴﺔ‬
    ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‪.‬‬
    ‫ﺍﻗﺮﺃ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻵﺗﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻮﻋﺒﻬﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
    ‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﻮﺍﺟﻪ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﻳﻦ ﺗﻌﺒًﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‬
    ‫ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻐﺜﻴﺎﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﺪﺍﻉ‪.‬‬
    ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺮﺿﺖ ﻷﻱ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻋﺮﺍﺽ‪ ،‬ﻓﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
    ‫ً‬
    ‫ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻭﺍﺧﻠﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﺭﺓ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺗﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﻗﺴﻄﺎ ﻣﻦ‬
    ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
    ‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺮﺗﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﺇﺟﻬﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
    ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺷﻌﺮﺕ ﺑﺈﺟﻬﺎﺩ ﺑﻌﻴﻨﻴﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‬
    ‫ﻭﺍﺧﻠﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﺭﺓ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺗﻨﺎﻭﻝ ً‬
    ‫ﻗﺴﻄﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
    ‫• ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺷﺨﺺ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻝ ﺑﺎﻻﻃﻤﺌﻨﺎﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺣﻴﻦ ﻵﺧﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
    ‫ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺬﻳﻦ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‪.‬‬
    ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻜﺎﻭﻯ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺟﻬﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﺪﺍﻉ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﺃﻭ‬
    ‫ﺍﻟﻐﺜﻴﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻣﻨﻊ ﻃﻔﻠﻚ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺟﻌﻠﻪ‬
    ‫ﻳﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ً‬
    ‫ﻗﺴﻄﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
    ‫• ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﺭﺓ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ ﻷﻏﺮﺍﺽ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﺭﺓ‬
    ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﻧﻈﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﺦ‪(.‬‬
    ‫• ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﺭﺓ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬
    ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻙ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﺭﺓ‬
    ‫ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺻﻄﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺎﻷﺷﻴﺎء ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺜﺮ ﻭ‪/‬‬
    ‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﻮﻉ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺧﻄﻴﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
    ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
    ‫ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻴﺔ )ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻭﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ‬
    ‫ﺗﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻴﺔ( ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ ‪HDMI OUT‬‬
    ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺭﺗ ِﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
    ‫ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‪.‬‬
    ‫• ﻳُﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ‬
    ‫ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ ‪.HDMI OUT‬‬
    ‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻷﻥ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ً‬
    ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺪﻗﺔ‬
    ‫•‬
    ‫ً‬
    ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﻔﻀﻞ‪.‬‬
    ‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﺜﻞ ‪ BD Wise‬ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
    ‫ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‪.‬‬
    ‫• ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‬
    ‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
    ‫• ﺍﺑﻖ ﺑﻌﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﻘﺪﺭ ﺑﺜﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﺿﻌﺎﻑ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
    ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‪ .‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
    ‫ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ‪ 46‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺑﺘﻌﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ‪ 3.5‬ﺃﻣﺘﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
    ‫• ﺿﻊ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ‬
    ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‪.‬‬
    ‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺒﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ‬
    ‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻴﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
    ‫• ﻻ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‪.‬‬
    ‫• ﻳﻌﺪ "‪ "Blu-ray 3D‬ﻭﺷﻌﺎﺭ "‪ "Blu-ray 3D‬ﻋﻼﻣﺘﻴﻦ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺘﻴﻦ‬
    ‫ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪.Blu-ray Disc Association‬‬



  • Page 65

    ‫ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ‬

    ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‬

    ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
    ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ‬
    ‫‪2‬‬
    ‫‪3‬‬
    ‫‪3‬‬
    ‫‪3‬‬
    ‫‪4‬‬
    ‫‪5‬‬

    ‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬
    ‫ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻭﺇﺩﺍﺭﺗﻪ‬
    ‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ‬
    ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺧﻴﺺ‬
    ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻴﺔ‬
    ‫ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ‬
    ‫ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬

    ‫‪6‬‬
    ‫‪7‬‬
    ‫‪10‬‬
    ‫‪11‬‬
    ‫‪11‬‬
    ‫‪12‬‬

    ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻭﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬
    ‫ﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‬
    ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
    ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‬
    ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬
    ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
    ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ‬

    ‫‪ 14‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ‬
    ‫‪ 17‬ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪/‬ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‬
    ‫‪ 18‬ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻤﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬

    ‫‪43‬‬
    ‫‪43‬‬
    ‫‪44‬‬
    ‫‪44‬‬
    ‫‪48‬‬
    ‫‪48‬‬
    ‫‪51‬‬
    ‫‪51‬‬

    ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ‪Samsung‬‬
    ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬
    ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ‬
    ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬
    ‫ﺍﻧﻌﻜﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
    ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺴﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ‬
    ‫ﺭﺑﻂ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬
    ‫™‪BD-LIVE‬‬
    ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬

    ‫‪ 52‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‬
    ‫‪ 56‬ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‬
    ‫‪ 59‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬

    ‫‪ ‬ﺗﻢ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
    ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﻛﻤﺮﺟﻊ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬
    ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
    ‫‪ ‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺣﺘﺴﺎﺏ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬
    ‫ﺑﻨﺎء ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﻠﺐ ﻣﻨﻚ ﻭﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻴﺐ‬
    ‫ﺃ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎء ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ً‬
    ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ(‬
    ‫ﺏ‪ .‬ﺇﺣﻀﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻠﻴﺢ ﻭﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻴﺐ‬
    ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ(‪.‬‬
    ‫‪ ‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﻼﻣﻚ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﻳﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺄﻱ ﺃﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ‬
    ‫ﺯﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬

    ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
    ‫‪19‬‬
    ‫‪19‬‬
    ‫‪19‬‬
    ‫‪20‬‬
    ‫‪24‬‬
    ‫‪25‬‬
    ‫‪28‬‬

    ‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ‬
    ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬
    ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
    ‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
    ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺕ‬
    ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬
    ‫ﺗﺮﻗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬

    ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪| 5‬‬

    ‫‪01‬‬

    ‫ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬

    ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ‬

    ‫ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ © ‪ 2013‬ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪.Samsung Electronics Co.,Ltd‬‬
    ‫ً‬
    ‫ﻛﺎﻣﻼ ﺃﻭ‬
    ‫ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻮﻕ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ؛ ﻭﻻ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ‬
    ‫ﺟﺰءًﺍ ﻣﻨﻪ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺇﺫﻥ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﻲ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪Samsung Electronics‬‬
    ‫‪.Co.,Ltd‬‬

    ‫‪30‬‬
    ‫‪30‬‬
    ‫‪30‬‬
    ‫‪31‬‬
    ‫‪31‬‬
    ‫‪32‬‬
    ‫‪35‬‬
    ‫‪39‬‬
    ‫‪40‬‬
    ‫‪41‬‬

    ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
    ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
    ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪USB‬‬
    ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
    ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪AllShare‬‬
    ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
    ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‬
    ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
    ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‬
    ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬



  • Page 66

    ‫ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
    ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻭﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬
    ‫ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‬
    ‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬

    ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‬

    ‫ﻗﺮﺹ ‪Blu-ray Disc‬‬
    ‫ﻗﺮﺹ ‪ Blu-ray‬ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‬
    ‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬

    ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‬
    ‫ﻗﺮﺹ ‪ BD-ROM‬ﺃﻭ ‪ BD-RE/-R‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪.BD-RE‬‬

    ‫‪،DVD-RW ،DVD-VIDEO‬‬
    ‫‪،DVD+RW ،DVD-R‬‬
    ‫‪DVD+R‬‬

    ‫ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ DVD-VIDEO‬ﻭ‪ DVD+RW/DVD-RW(V)/DVD-R/+R‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‬
    ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻭﺇﻧﻬﺎﺅﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ‪ DivX‬ﻭ‬
    ‫‪ MKV‬ﻭ‪.MP4‬‬

    ‫ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‬

    ‫‪،CD-RW/-R‬‬
    ‫‪،DVD-RW/-R‬‬
    ‫‪BD-RE/-R‬‬

    ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ CD-RW/-R‬ﺃﻭ ‪ DVD-RW/-R‬ﺃﻭ ‪BD-RE/-R‬‬
    ‫ﺃﻭ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ‪ MP3‬ﺃﻭ ‪.WMA‬‬

    ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬

    ‫‪،CD-RW/-R‬‬
    ‫‪،DVD-RW/-R‬‬
    ‫‪BD-RE/-R‬‬

    ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ CD-RW/-R‬ﺃﻭ ‪ DVD-RW/-R‬ﺃﻭ ‪ BD-RE/-R‬ﺃﻭ‬
    ‫ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ‪.JPEG‬‬

    ‫| ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |‬

    ‫‪‬‬
    ‫‪‬‬
    ‫‪‬‬
    ‫‪‬‬
    ‫‪‬‬
    ‫‪‬‬

    ‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ CD-RW/-R‬ﻭ‪ DVD-R‬ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
    ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ ‪ DVD-RW/-R‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ ،DVD‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ً‬
    ‫ﻗﺎﺑﻼ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
    ‫ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ DVD-R‬ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ ﺑﺖ ﻳﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ‪ 10‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
    ‫ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ BD-R‬ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ USB‬ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ ﺑﺖ ﻳﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ‪ 30‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
    ‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ‬
    ‫ﻣﻜﺘﻮﺑﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻠﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪ .‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
    ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪ ،BD-J‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺑﺒﻂء‪.‬‬

    ‫ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‬
    ‫• ‪HD DVD‬‬
    ‫• ﻗﺮﺹ‬
    ‫‪ ،DVD-ROM/PD/MV‬ﺇﻟﺦ‬

    ‫• ‪) DVD-RW‬ﻭﺿﻊ ‪(VR‬‬
    ‫• ‪DVD-RAM‬‬
    ‫• ‪CVD/CD-ROM/CDV/‬‬
    ‫• ﻗﺮﺹ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ‬
    ‫‪CD-G/CD-I/LD‬‬
    ‫ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ )ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ‬
    ‫)ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ CD-G‬ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
    ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ(‬
    ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪(.‬‬

    ‫• ﻗﺮﺹ ‪ DVD-R‬ﺑﺴﻌﺔ ‪3.9‬‬
    ‫ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻟﻴﻒ‪.‬‬

    ‫| ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |‬

    ‫‪‬‬
    ‫‪‬‬
    ‫‪‬‬
    ‫‪‬‬

    ‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺴﺘﺠﻴﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻞ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻷﻥ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ Blu-ray‬ﻭ‪ DVD‬ﻭﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﻭﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬
    ‫ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
    ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺟﺎء ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺃﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻻ ﻳﻌﺪ ﻋﻴﺒًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬
    ‫ﻻ ﺗﻀﻤﻦ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪ Samsung‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻳﺤﻤﻞ ﺷﻌﺎﺭ ‪ Blu-ray Disc‬ﺃﻭ ‪ DVD‬ﺃﻭ ‪ CD‬ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺗﻄﻮﺭ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﺙ ﻣﺸﺎﻛﻞ‬
    ‫ﻭﺃﺧﻄﺎء ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ Blu-ray‬ﻭ‪ DVD‬ﻭﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻌﺔ ﻟﻸﻗﺮﺍﺹ‪.‬‬
    ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺟﺎء ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻋﻤﻼء ‪ ،SAMSUNG‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﺳﺌﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺘﻚ ﺻﻌﻮﺑﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ Blu-ray Disc‬ﺃﻭ ‪ DVD‬ﺃﻭ‬
    ‫ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ .‬ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻗﻴﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
    ‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ DVD‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺷﺮﺍﺅﻫﺎ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺘﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬

    ‫|‪6‬‬

    ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬



  • Page 67

    ‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬

    ‫ﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‬

    ‫ﻗﺮﺹ ‪Blu-ray‬‬
    ‫‪Disc‬‬

    ‫‪A‬‬

    ‫ﺃﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺃﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻄﻰ‬
    ‫ﻭﺃﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎ ﺍﻟﺠﻨﻮﺑﻴﺔ ﻭﻛﻮﺭﻳﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﻴﺎﺑﺎﻥ‬
    ‫ﻭﺗﺎﻳﻮﺍﻥ ﻭﻫﻮﻧﺞ ﻛﻮﻧﺞ ﻭﺟﻨﻮﺏ ﺷﺮﻕ‬
    ‫ﺁﺳﻴﺎ‪.‬‬

    ‫‪B‬‬

    ‫ﺃﻭﺭﻭﺑﺎ ﻭﺟﺮﻳﻦ ﻻﻧﺪ ﻭﺍﻷﻗﺎﻟﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻧﺴﻴﺔ‬
    ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺮﻕ ﺍﻷﻭﺳﻂ ﻭﺇﻓﺮﻳﻘﻴﺎ ﻭﺃﺳﺘﺮﺍﻟﻴﺎ‬
    ‫ﻭﻧﻴﻮﺯﻳﻠﻨﺪﺍ‪.‬‬

    ‫‪C‬‬

    ‫ﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻴﻦ ﻭﺭﻭﺳﻴﺎ ﻭﻭﺳﻂ ﻭﺟﻨﻮﺏ‬
    ‫ﺁﺳﻴﺎ‪.‬‬

    ‫‪1‬‬

    ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﻭﺍﻷﻗﺎﻟﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬
    ‫ﻟﻠﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﻭﻛﻨﺪﺍ‬

    ‫‪2‬‬

    ‫ﺃﻭﺭﻭﺑﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﻴﺎﺑﺎﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺮﻕ ﺍﻷﻭﺳﻂ ﻭﻣﺼﺮ‬
    ‫ﻭﺇﻓﺮﻳﻘﻴﺎ ﻭﺟﺮﻳﻦ ﻻﻧﺪ‬

    ‫‪3‬‬

    ‫ﺗﺎﻳﻮﺍﻥ ﻭﻛﻮﺭﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﺒﻴﻦ ﻭﺃﻧﺪﻭﻧﻴﺴﻴﺎ‬
    ‫ﻭﻫﻮﻧﺞ ﻛﻮﻧﺞ‬

    ‫‪DVD-VIDEO‬‬

    ‫‪4‬‬

    ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺴﻴﻚ ﻭﺃﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎ ﺍﻟﺠﻨﻮﺑﻴﺔ ﻭﺃﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎ‬
    ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻄﻰ ﻭﺃﺳﺘﺮﺍﻟﻴﺎ ﻭﻧﻴﻮﺯﻳﻠﻨﺪﺍ ﻭﺟﺰﺭ‬
    ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺩﺉ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺎﺭﻳﺒﻲ‬

    ‫‪5‬‬

    ‫ﺭﻭﺳﻴﺎ ﻭﺃﻭﺭﻭﺑﺎ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻗﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﻨﺪ ﻭﻛﻮﺭﻳﺎ‬
    ‫ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﻣﻨﻐﻮﻟﻴﺎ‬

    ‫‪6‬‬

    ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻦ‬

    ‫ﻗﺮﺹ ‪Blu-ray Disc‬‬

    ‫ﻗﺮﺹ ‪ Blu-ray‬ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‬

    ‫‪Dolby‬‬

    ‫‪BD-LIVE‬‬

    ‫‪DTS‬‬

    ‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﺚ ‪ PAL‬ﻓﻲ‬
    ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻠﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﻭﻓﺮﻧﺴﺎ‬
    ‫ﻭﺃﻟﻤﺎﻧﻴﺎ ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ‬

    ‫‪DivX‬‬

    ‫‪Java‬‬

    ‫| ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |‬
    ‫‪ ‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ Blu-ray Disc/DVD‬ﻻ ﻳﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺭﻣﺰ‬
    ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬

    ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪| 7‬‬

    ‫ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬

    ‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬

    ‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬

    ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬

    ‫‪02‬‬

    ‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻻﺑﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ‬
    ‫ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ‬
    ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
    ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬



  • Page 68

    ‫ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
    ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ‬
    ‫ﺩﻋﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬

    ‫ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬

    ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻭﻳﺔ‬

    ‫*‪avi.‬‬
    ‫*‪mkv.‬‬
    ‫*‪asf.‬‬
    ‫*‪wmv.‬‬
    ‫*‪mp4.‬‬
    ‫*‪3gp.‬‬
    ‫*‪vro.‬‬
    ‫*‪mpg.‬‬
    ‫*‪mpeg.‬‬
    ‫*‪ts.‬‬
    ‫*‪tp.‬‬
    ‫*‪trp.‬‬
    ‫*‪mov.‬‬
    ‫*‪flv.‬‬
    ‫*‪vob.‬‬
    ‫*‪svi.‬‬
    ‫*‪m2ts.‬‬
    ‫*‪mts.‬‬
    ‫*‪divx.‬‬

    ‫‪AVI‬‬
    ‫‪MKV‬‬
    ‫‪ASF‬‬
    ‫‪MP4‬‬
    ‫‪3GP‬‬
    ‫‪MOV‬‬
    ‫‪FLV‬‬
    ‫‪VRO‬‬
    ‫‪VOB‬‬
    ‫‪PS‬‬
    ‫‪TS‬‬
    ‫‪SVAF‬‬

    ‫*‪webm.‬‬

    ‫‪WebM‬‬

    ‫‪Resolution‬‬
    ‫)ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ(‬

    ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
    ‫‪Divx 3.11 / 4‬‬
    ‫‪6/5/‬‬
    ‫‪MPEG4 SP/‬‬
    ‫‪ASP‬‬
    ‫‪/H.264 BP‬‬
    ‫‪MP/HP‬‬
    ‫‪Motion JPEG‬‬
    ‫‪Microsoft‬‬
    ‫‪MPEG-4 v3‬‬

    ‫‪1080×1920‬‬
    ‫)‪،WMV v7،v8‬‬
    ‫‪:MSMPEG4 v3‬‬
    ‫‪(720×1280‬‬

    ‫‬‫‬‫‬‫‬‫‪-‬‬

    ‫‪MPEG2‬‬

    ‫‪-‬‬

    ‫‪4‬‬
    ‫‪60‬‬
    ‫‪20‬‬

    ‫‪VP6‬‬

    ‫‪480×640‬‬

    ‫‪MVC‬‬

    ‫‪-‬‬

    ‫‪24/25/30‬‬

    ‫‪VP8‬‬

    ‫‪1080×1920‬‬

    ‫‪30~6‬‬

    ‫‪ ‬ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻚ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
    ‫ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ H.264‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ‪) 4.1‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ‪(FMO/ASO/RS‬‬‫ ﻻ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ‪VC1 AP L4‬‬‫ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻋﺪﺍ ‪ WMV v7‬ﻭ‪ v8‬ﻭ‪ MSMPEG4 v3‬ﻭ‪ MVC‬ﻭ‪VP6‬‬‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍ‬
    ‫ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪ :720 × 1280‬ﺑﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ‪ً 60‬‬
    ‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍ‬
    ‫ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ‪ :720 × 1280‬ﺑﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ‪ً 30‬‬

    ‫|‪8‬‬

    ‫‪Dolby Digital‬‬
    ‫‪LPCM‬‬
    ‫‪ADPCM‬‬
    ‫)‪(MS ،IMA‬‬
    ‫‪AAC‬‬
    ‫‪HE-AAC‬‬
    ‫‪WMA‬‬
    ‫‪Dolby Digital‬‬
    ‫‪Plus‬‬
    ‫‪(MP3)MPEG‬‬
    ‫‪(Core) DTS‬‬

    ‫‪MPEG1‬‬

    ‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺑﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ‬
    ‫ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪ ،‬ﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﺍﻩ ً‬
    ‫ﺗﺎﻟﻔﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻠﻞ‪.‬‬
    ‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺧﺎﻃﺌﺔ ﺃﻭ‬
    ‫ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ً‬
    ‫ﺗﺎﻟﻔﺎ‪.‬‬
    ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺑﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ‬
    ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
    ‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ )ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻲ( ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
    ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
    ‫ﺣﺴﺐ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪.‬‬
    ‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪/USB‬ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬

    ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬

    ‫‪30~6‬‬

    ‫‪30‬‬

    ‫‪Window Media‬‬
    ‫‪،v8 ،Video v7‬‬
    ‫‪v9‬‬

    ‫‪ ‬ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻮﺩ‬
    ‫‪-‬‬

    ‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
    ‫)ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ(‬

    ‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺖ‬
    ‫)ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺖ ﻓﻲ‬
    ‫ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ(‬

    ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰ‬
    ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬

    ‫‪Vorbis‬‬

    ‫ ﻻ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ‪ GMC 2‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ‪ SVAF‬ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‪/‬ﺃﺳﻔﻞ‪ ،‬ﺟﻨﺒًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻨﺐ ﻓﻘﻂ‬‫‪ -‬ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ‪ BD MVC‬ﻓﻘﻂ‬

    ‫‪ ‬ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻚ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
    ‫‬‫‬‫‬‫‬‫‬‫‬‫‪-‬‬

    ‫ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ‪) WMA 10 Pro‬ﺣﺘﻰ ‪(5.1‬‬
    ‫ﻻ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺻﻮﺕ ‪.WMA lossless‬‬
    ‫ﺩﻋﻢ ‪.MS ،ADPCM IMA‬‬
    ‫ﻻ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ‪(μ-Low ،A-Law) ADPCM‬‬
    ‫ﻻ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ‪ QCELP‬ﻭ‪AMR NB/WB‬‬
    ‫ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ‪) vorbis‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻗﻨﺎﺗﻴﻦ(‪،‬‬
    ‫ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ‪) Dolby Digital Plus‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ‪(7.1‬‬

    ‫‪ ‬ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬
    ‫‬‫‬‫‬‫‬‫‪-‬‬

    ‫‪ : MPEG4‬ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪GMC 1-Warping Point‬‬
    ‫‪ : H.264‬ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ BP/MP/HP‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ‪.4.1‬‬
    ‫‪ : WMV‬ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ V9‬ﻭ‪.VC1 SP/MP/AP L3‬‬
    ‫‪ : MPEG1‬ﻻ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪.D‬‬
    ‫‪ : MPEG2‬ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪.Hight Profile High Level‬‬



  • Page 69

    ‫ﺩﻋﻢ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬

    ‫❑ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺔ ‪ DivX‬ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ‬
    ‫*‪ ttxt.‬ﻭ*‪ smi.‬ﻭ*‪ srt.‬ﻭ*‪ sub.‬ﻭ*‪txt.‬‬
    ‫‪ ‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ MKV‬ﻭ‪ ،MP4‬ﺣﺴﺐ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
    ‫ﻭﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬

    ‫*‪jpg.‬‬
    ‫*‪jpeg.‬‬

    ‫‪JPEG‬‬

    ‫‪8640×15360‬‬

    ‫ﺩﻋﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‬

    ‫*‪png.‬‬

    ‫‪PNG‬‬

    ‫‪4096×4096‬‬

    ‫*‪bmp.‬‬

    ‫‪BMP‬‬

    ‫‪4096×4096‬‬

    ‫*‪mp3.‬‬

    ‫‪MPEG‬‬

    ‫‪MPEG1‬‬
    ‫‪Audio‬‬
    ‫)ﺻﻮﺕ(‬
    ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺜﺔ‬

    ‫‪-‬‬

    ‫*‪m4a.‬‬
    ‫*‪mpa.‬‬
    ‫*‪aac.‬‬

    ‫‪MPEG4‬‬

    ‫‪AAC‬‬

    ‫‪-‬‬

    ‫*‪flac.‬‬

    ‫‪FLAC‬‬

    ‫‪FLAC‬‬

    ‫ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻗﻨﺎﺗﻴﻦ‬

    ‫*‪ogg.‬‬

    ‫‪OGG‬‬

    ‫‪Vorbis‬‬

    ‫ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻗﻨﺎﺗﻴﻦ‬

    ‫*‪wma.‬‬

    ‫‪WMA‬‬

    ‫‪WMA‬‬

    ‫ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪WMA 10‬‬
    ‫‪) Pro‬ﺣﺘﻰ ‪(5.1‬‬
    ‫ﻻ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ‬
    ‫ﺻﻮﺕ ‪WMA‬‬
    ‫‪lossless‬‬
    ‫ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ‬
    ‫‪M2‬‬
    ‫ﻻ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪LBR‬‬

    ‫*‪wav.‬‬

    ‫‪wav‬‬

    ‫‪wav‬‬

    ‫‪-‬‬

    ‫•‬

    ‫*‪mid.‬‬
    ‫*‪midi.‬‬

    ‫‪midi‬‬

    ‫‪midi‬‬

    ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪ 0‬ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪1‬‬

    ‫•‬

    ‫*‪ape.‬‬

    ‫‪ape‬‬

    ‫‪ape‬‬

    ‫ﻻ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ‬
    ‫‪ X13‬ﻭ‪NVT‬‬

    ‫*‪mpo.‬‬

    ‫‪MPO‬‬

    ‫‪8640×15360‬‬

    ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪USB‬‬
    ‫•‬
    ‫•‬
    ‫•‬
    ‫•‬
    ‫•‬
    ‫•‬
    ‫•‬
    ‫•‬
    ‫•‬
    ‫•‬
    ‫•‬
    ‫•‬

    ‫ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ‪ USB‬ﻭﻣﺸﻐﻼﺕ ‪ MP3‬ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬
    ‫ﻭﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪.USB‬‬
    ‫ﻻ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﻃﻮﻟﻬﺎ ﻋﻦ ‪128‬‬
    ‫ً‬
    ‫ﺣﺮﻓﺎ‪.‬‬
    ‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪/USB‬ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬
    ‫ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ FAT 16‬ﻭ‪ FAT 32‬ﻭ‪.NTFS‬‬
    ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪ USB‬ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ ‪ USB‬ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ‬
    ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻣﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﺗﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ‪.‬‬
    ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺭﺉ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬
    ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺭﺉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
    ‫ﻻ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺮﻭﺗﻮﻛﻮﻝ ‪.PTP‬‬
    ‫ﻻ ﺗﻔﺼﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ USB‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ "ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ"‪.‬‬
    ‫ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺍﺯﺩﺍﺩﺕ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺴﺘﻐﺮﻗﻪ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
    ‫ﻻ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ MP3‬ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑـ ‪) DRM‬ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ‬
    ‫ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ( ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
    ‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‬
    ‫ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻘﻞ ﻋﻦ ‪ً 30‬‬
    ‫)ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ(‪.‬‬
    ‫ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪ USB‬ﻓﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ )‪(MSC‬‬
    ‫ﻣﺜﻞ ﻣﺤﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﻭﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪.USB‬‬
    ‫)‪ HUB‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻡ‪(.‬‬
    ‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻣﺤﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ‪ USB‬ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻭﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ‬
    ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻭﻣﺤﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬
    ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺣﺘﺎﺟﺖ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪ USB‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺯﺍﺋﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﺓ‬
    ‫ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺃﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ‪.‬‬

    ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪| 9‬‬

    ‫ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬

    ‫ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬

    ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻭﻳﺔ‬

    ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
    ‫ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰ‬
    ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬

    ‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﻋﻢ‬

    ‫‪02‬‬

    ‫ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬

    ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‬

    ‫| ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |‬

    ‫ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‬



  • Page 70

    ‫ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
    ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ‪ USB‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺑﻤﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ‬
    ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻌﺔ ﻟﻤﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ‪.USB‬‬
    ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ‪ SAMSUNG‬ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻟﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻱ ﺗﻠﻒ ﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻘﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬

    ‫‪AVCHD‬‬
    ‫)ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ(‬
    ‫•‬
    ‫•‬
    ‫•‬
    ‫•‬
    ‫•‬
    ‫•‬

    ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ .AVCHD‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
    ‫ﺇﻥ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ AVCHD‬ﻫﻮ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ‪.‬‬
    ‫ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ MPEG-4 AVC/H.264‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﻜﻔﺎءﺓ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﺪﻱ‪.‬‬
    ‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ AVCHD‬ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ "‪ ."x.v.Colour‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ AVCHD‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ "‪."x.v.Colour‬‬
    ‫ﺇﻥ "‪ "x.v.Colour‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪.Sony Corporation‬‬
    ‫ﻳﻌﺪ "‪ "AVCHD‬ﻭﺷﻌﺎﺭ ‪ AVCHD‬ﻋﻼﻣﺘﻴﻦ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺘﺎﻥ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪Matsushita Electronic Industrial Co., Ltd.‬‬
    ‫ﻭ‪.Sony Corporation‬‬

    ‫| ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |‬

    ‫‪‬‬
    ‫‪‬‬
    ‫‪‬‬
    ‫‪‬‬

    ‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ ،AVCHD‬ﺣﺴﺐ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
    ‫ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺇﻗﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪.AVCHD‬‬
    ‫ﺗﻘﺪﻡ "‪ "x.v.Colour‬ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ DVD‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
    ‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ DivX‬ﻭ‪ MKV‬ﻭ‪ً ،MP4‬‬
    ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬

    ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
    ‫ﺍﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬

    ‫‪TV‬‬

    ‫‪BD‬‬
    ‫‪RECEIVER‬‬
    ‫‪FUNCTION‬‬
    ‫‪TV/SOURCE‬‬

    ‫‪2‬‬
    ‫‪5‬‬
    ‫‪8‬‬
    ‫‪0‬‬

    ‫‪3‬‬
    ‫‪6‬‬
    ‫‪9‬‬
    ‫‪TITLE MENU‬‬
    ‫‪POPUP‬‬

    ‫‪1‬‬
    ‫‪4‬‬
    ‫‪7‬‬
    ‫‪DISC‬‬
    ‫‪MENU‬‬

    ‫ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ‪ASC‬‬

    ‫‪MUTE‬‬

    ‫‪TUNING‬‬
    ‫‪/ CH‬‬

    ‫‪SLEEP‬‬

    ‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪HDMI‬‬

    ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬

    ‫‪VOL‬‬
    ‫‪TV‬‬
    ‫‪SOUND‬‬

    ‫‪HOME‬‬

    ‫‪S/W‬‬
    ‫‪LEVEL‬‬

    ‫‪INFO‬‬

    ‫‪TOOLS‬‬

    ‫‪EXIT‬‬

    ‫‪RETURN‬‬

    ‫‪TUNERMEMORY MO/ST‬‬

    ‫‪D‬‬

    ‫‪C‬‬

    ‫‪B‬‬

    ‫‪A‬‬

    ‫‪SMART‬‬
    ‫‪SOUND‬‬
    ‫‪3D‬‬
    ‫‪HUB SEARCH EFFECT SOUND‬‬

    ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪/‬‬
    ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ )ﺑﺤﺠﻢ ‪(AAA‬‬

    ‫| ‪10‬‬

    ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬

    ‫ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ‬

    ‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬

    ‫ﻫﻮﺍﺋﻲ ‪FM‬‬



  • Page 71

    ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‬
    ‫‪02‬‬

    ‫ﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺫﻭ‬
    ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻤﺎﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﻏﺔ‬
    ‫ﻓﺘﺢ‪/‬ﻏﻠﻖ‬

    ‫‪D‬‬
    ‫‪H-EN‬‬
    ‫‪HIG‬‬

    ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬

    ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬

    ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬

    ‫ﺩﺭﺝ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ‬
    ‫‪USB‬‬

    ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬

    ‫ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬

    ‫‪5V‬‬
    ‫‪0.5A‬‬

    ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
    ‫| ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |‬

    ‫‪‬‬

    ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻮﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺨﻢ ﺫﻱ ﺍﻟﺼﻤﺎﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﻏﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺿﻮﺿﺎء‬
    ‫ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﻪ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
    ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻸﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ .‬ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺳﺎﺧ ًﻨﺎ‪.‬‬
    ‫ﻟﺘﺮﻗﻴﺔ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ‪ ،USB‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ USB‬ﻣﺤﻤﻮﻝ‪.‬‬
    ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ ،Blu-ray Disc‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺑﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ 6‬ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
    ‫"ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ" ﺃﻭ "ﺑﺪء" ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.E‬‬
    ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ USB‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ BD/DVD‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺯﺭ ‪ .FUNCTION‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
    ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﺭﻱ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ً‬
    ‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪.BD/DVD‬‬

    ‫‪‬‬
    ‫‪‬‬
    ‫‪‬‬
    ‫‪‬‬

    ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬
    ‫* ﻫﻮﺍﺋﻲ ‪FM‬‬

    ‫ﻣﺪﺧﻞ ‪ASC‬‬

    ‫ﻣﺪﺧﻞ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻲ‬
    ‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬
    ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬

    ‫ﻣﻮﺻﻼﺕ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ‬
    ‫ﻣﺮﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺮﻳﺪ‬

    ‫‪FM ANT‬‬

    ‫‪POWER‬‬

    ‫‪R‬‬

    ‫‪FRONT TOP‬‬

    ‫‪FRONT‬‬

    ‫‪SPEAKERS OUT‬‬

    ‫‪L‬‬

    ‫‪FRONT TOP‬‬

    ‫‪L‬‬

    ‫‪R‬‬

    ‫‪FRONT‬‬

    ‫‪CENTER‬‬

    ‫‪SUBWOOFER‬‬

    ‫Ÿ‪IMPEDANCE : 3‬‬

    ‫ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬

    ‫ﻣﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ )ﺑﺼﺮﻱ(‬

    ‫‪AUX IN‬‬

    ‫‪LAN‬‬
    ‫‪OPTICAL‬‬

    ‫‪L‬‬

    ‫‪ASC IN‬‬

    ‫‪DIGITAL‬‬
    ‫‪AUDIO IN‬‬

    ‫‪R‬‬

    ‫ﻣﺪﺧﻞ ‪HDMI‬‬

    ‫‪2‬‬

    ‫‪HDMI IN‬‬

    ‫‪1‬‬

    ‫‪HDMI OUT‬‬

    ‫ﻣﺨﺮﺝ ‪HDMI‬‬

    ‫* ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻫﻮﺍﺋﻲ ‪FM‬‬

    ‫‪.1‬‬
    ‫‪.2‬‬

    ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻫﻮﺍﺋﻲ ‪ FM‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﺑﻤﻘﺒﺲ ‪.FM ANT‬‬
    ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺑﺒﻂء ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺠﺪ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺠﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺘﻪ ﺑﺤﺎﺋﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺻﻠﺐ ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬

    ‫| ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |‬
    ‫‪ ‬ﺣﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺮﻙ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺧﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪ 10‬ﺳﻢ ﻛﺤﺪ ﺃﺩﻧﻰ ﺑﻜﻞ ﺟﻮﺍﻧﺐ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻴﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﺪ ﻓﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻓﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
    ‫‪ ‬ﻻ ﻳﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺑﺚ ‪.AM‬‬

    ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪| 11‬‬

    ‫ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬

    ‫‪VACUUM TUBE SO‬‬
    ‫‪UND‬‬

    ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ‬



  • Page 72

    ‫ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
    ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
    ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
    ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻨﻤﺎ‬
    ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ‬
    ‫ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‪.‬‬
    ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﺑﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ‬
    ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ :‬ﺃﺧﻀﺮ‬
    ‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ‬
    ‫ﺑﻌﺪ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬
    ‫ﻣﻀﻴﺌﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻭﺟﻴﺰﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
    ‫)ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
    ‫ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺳﻴﻘﻠﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻭﻗﺖ‬
    ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪(.‬‬

    ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔ‪/‬‬
    ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ‪.‬‬

    ‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬

    ‫‪TV‬‬

    ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
    ‫)‪ HDMI1‬ﻭ‪ AUX‬ﻭ‪ BD/DVD‬ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ(‪.‬‬
    ‫ﺃﻭ‬
    ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬

    ‫‪BD‬‬
    ‫‪RECEIVER‬‬
    ‫‪FUNCTION‬‬
    ‫‪TV/SOURCE‬‬

    ‫‪2‬‬
    ‫‪5‬‬
    ‫‪8‬‬
    ‫‪0‬‬

    ‫‪3‬‬
    ‫‪6‬‬
    ‫‪9‬‬
    ‫‪TITLE MENU‬‬
    ‫‪POPUP‬‬

    ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺩﺭﺝ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﻭﺇﻏﻼﻗﻪ‪.‬‬

    ‫‪1‬‬
    ‫‪4‬‬
    ‫‪7‬‬
    ‫‪DISC‬‬
    ‫‪MENU‬‬

    ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ً‬
    ‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ‪.‬‬

    ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪/‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
    ‫ﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ً‬
    ‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ‪.‬‬

    ‫‪MUTE‬‬

    ‫‪TUNING‬‬
    ‫‪/ CH‬‬

    ‫‪VOL‬‬
    ‫‪TV‬‬
    ‫‪SOUND‬‬

    ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
    ‫ﻗﺮﺹ ‪.Blu-ray/DVD‬‬
    ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬

    ‫‪SLEEP‬‬

    ‫‪HOME‬‬

    ‫‪S/W‬‬
    ‫‪LEVEL‬‬

    ‫‪INFO‬‬

    ‫‪TOOLS‬‬

    ‫‪EXIT‬‬

    ‫‪RETURN‬‬

    ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪.‬‬

    ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‪.‬‬
    ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬

    ‫| ‪12‬‬

    ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬

    ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
    ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
    ‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
    ‫ﻭﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬

    ‫‪TUNERMEMORY MO/ST‬‬

    ‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ "ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ" ﺃﻭ "ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ" ﻟﺒﺚ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‪.‬‬

    ‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
    ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ‬
    ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪) .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ‬
    ‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(42‬‬

    ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
    ‫ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬

    ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
    ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻟﻠﺘﺨﻄﻲ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ‪.‬‬

    ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ‪.‬‬

    ‫ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺤﻄﺎﺕ ‪ FM‬ﺍﻟﻨﺸﻄﺔ ﻭﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬

    ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬

    ‫‪D‬‬

    ‫‪C‬‬

    ‫‪B‬‬

    ‫‪A‬‬

    ‫‪SMART‬‬
    ‫‪SOUND‬‬
    ‫‪3D‬‬
    ‫‪HUB SEARCH EFFECT SOUND‬‬

    ‫ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
    ‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬
    ‫ً‬
    ‫ﻭﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻗﺮﺹ ‪Blu-ray‬‬
    ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬
    ‫‪ Disc‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
    ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪.Smart Hub‬‬
    ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‪.‬‬



  • Page 73

    ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬

    ‫ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬

    ‫‪A Mark‬‬

    ‫‪15 ,01‬‬

    ‫‪Anam‬‬

    ‫| ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |‬
    ‫‪ ‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺒﻴﻦ "‪ "+‬ﻭ "–" ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺘﻴﻦ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ‬
    ‫ﺣﺠﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
    ‫‪ ‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺪﻭﻡ ﻣﺪﺓ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺳﻨﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
    ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
    ‫‪ ‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 7‬ﺃﻣﺘﺎﺭ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻣﻦ‬
    ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻓﻲ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ‪.‬‬

    ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
    ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
    ‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬

    ‫‪.1‬‬

    ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ TV‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
    ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬

    ‫‪.2‬‬

    ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬

    ‫‪ .3‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻇﺮ‬
    ‫ﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
    ‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﺪﺭﺝ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ‬
    ‫ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺐ‪.‬‬
    ‫• ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ‪ :‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪Samsung‬‬
    ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬
    ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ‪ .00‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳُﻔﻠﺢ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﺠﺮﺏ ‪ ،15‬ﺛﻢ ‪،16‬‬
    ‫ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
    ‫‪ .4‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻳﻜﺘﻤﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
    ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ "ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ" ﻭ"ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ" ﻭ"ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ"‬
    ‫ﻭﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ )‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.(9‬‬
    ‫| ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |‬
    ‫‪ ‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‪ ،‬ﺣﺴﺐ‬
    ‫ﻣﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ً .‬‬
    ‫ﻭﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻌﺾ‬
    ‫ﻣﺎﺭﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
    ‫‪ ‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﻊ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺗﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
    ‫‪.Samsung‬‬

    ‫‪AOC‬‬
    ‫‪Bell & Howell‬‬
    ‫)‪(M.Wards‬‬
    ‫‪Brocsonic‬‬
    ‫‪Candle‬‬
    ‫‪Cetronic‬‬
    ‫‪Citizen‬‬
    ‫‪Cinema‬‬
    ‫‪Classic‬‬
    ‫‪Concerto‬‬
    ‫‪Contec‬‬
    ‫‪Coronado‬‬
    ‫‪Craig‬‬
    ‫‪Croslex‬‬
    ‫‪Crown‬‬
    ‫‪Curtis Mates‬‬
    ‫‪CXC‬‬
    ‫‪Daewoo‬‬
    ‫‪Daytron‬‬
    ‫‪Dynasty‬‬
    ‫‪Emerson‬‬
    ‫‪Fisher‬‬
    ‫‪Funai‬‬
    ‫‪Futuretech‬‬
    ‫‪General‬‬
    ‫‪(GE) Electric‬‬
    ‫‪Hall Mark‬‬
    ‫‪Hitachi‬‬
    ‫‪Inkel‬‬
    ‫‪JC Penny‬‬
    ‫‪JVC‬‬
    ‫‪KTV‬‬
    ‫‪KEC‬‬
    ‫‪KMC‬‬

    ‫‪,06 ,05 ,04 ,03 ,02 ,01‬‬
    ‫‪,12 ,11 ,10 ,09 ,08 ,07‬‬
    ‫‪14 ,13‬‬
    ‫‪48 ,40 ,18 ,01‬‬
    ‫‪81 ,58 ,57‬‬

    ‫‪MTC‬‬

    ‫‪18‬‬

    ‫‪NEC‬‬

    ‫‪60 ,59 ,40 ,20 ,19 ,18‬‬

    ‫‪Nikei‬‬
    ‫‪Onking‬‬
    ‫‪Onwa‬‬

    ‫‪03‬‬
    ‫‪03‬‬
    ‫‪03‬‬
    ‫‪,66 ,54 ,09 ,08 ,07 ,06‬‬
    ‫‪74 ,73 ,67‬‬
    ‫‪18‬‬
    ‫‪,54 ,48 ,18 ,17 ,15 ,03‬‬
    ‫‪90 ,69 ,62 ,59‬‬
    ‫‪,54 ,48 ,40 ,18 ,17 ,15‬‬
    ‫‪72 ,62‬‬
    ‫‪91 ,80 ,66 ,63‬‬
    ‫‪59 ,18 ,15‬‬
    ‫‪40‬‬
    ‫‪67 ,66 ,06‬‬
    ‫‪75 ,61 ,60 ,56 ,48 ,17‬‬
    ‫‪,78 ,77 ,76 ,67 ,59 ,18‬‬
    ‫‪94 ,93 ,92‬‬
    ‫‪19 ,03‬‬
    ‫‪40‬‬

    ‫‪Panasonic‬‬
    ‫‪Penney‬‬

    ‫‪60 ,59‬‬
    ‫‪18‬‬
    ‫‪03‬‬
    ‫‪25 ,18 ,03‬‬
    ‫‪97‬‬
    ‫‪03‬‬
    ‫‪18‬‬
    ‫‪46‬‬
    ‫‪15‬‬
    ‫‪84 ,83 ,82 ,61 ,05 ,03‬‬
    ‫‪62‬‬
    ‫‪03‬‬
    ‫‪63 ,61 ,59‬‬
    ‫‪03‬‬
    ‫‪,17 ,16 ,15 ,04 ,03 ,02‬‬
    ‫‪,23 ,22 ,21 ,20 ,19 ,18‬‬
    ‫‪,29 ,28 ,27 ,26 ,25 ,24‬‬
    ‫‪,48 ,36 ,35 ,34 ,32 ,30‬‬
    ‫‪90 ,59‬‬
    ‫‪40‬‬
    ‫‪03‬‬
    ‫‪,61 ,59 ,46 ,40 ,15 ,03‬‬
    ‫‪85 ,84 ,83 ,82 ,64‬‬
    ‫‪65 ,19‬‬
    ‫‪03‬‬
    ‫‪03‬‬

    ‫‪Sony‬‬

    ‫‪55 ,53 ,52 ,51 ,50‬‬

    ‫‪Soundesign‬‬
    ‫‪Spectricon‬‬

    ‫‪40 ,03‬‬
    ‫‪01‬‬

    ‫‪68 ,67 ,66 ,59 ,56 ,40 ,06‬‬

    ‫‪SSS‬‬
    ‫‪Sylvania‬‬

    ‫‪Philco‬‬
    ‫‪Philips‬‬
    ‫‪Pioneer‬‬
    ‫‪Portland‬‬
    ‫‪Proton‬‬
    ‫‪Quasar‬‬
    ‫‪Radio Shack‬‬
    ‫‪RCA/Proscan‬‬
    ‫‪Realistic‬‬
    ‫‪Sampo‬‬
    ‫‪Samsung‬‬
    ‫‪Sanyo‬‬
    ‫‪Scott‬‬
    ‫‪Sears‬‬
    ‫‪Sharp‬‬
    ‫‪Signature 2000‬‬
    ‫)‪(M.Wards‬‬

    ‫‪,43 ,40 ,17 ,16 ,15 ,00‬‬
    ‫‪,49 ,48 ,47 ,46‬‬
    ‫‪98 ,60 ,59‬‬
    ‫‪65 ,61 ,19‬‬
    ‫‪61 ,60 ,40 ,03‬‬
    ‫‪19 ,18 ,15‬‬
    ‫‪64 ,57 ,15‬‬
    ‫‪58 ,57‬‬

    ‫‪18‬‬
    ‫‪,59 ,54 ,48 ,40 ,18‬‬
    ‫‪62 ,60‬‬
    ‫‪96 ,95 ,61‬‬
    ‫‪06‬‬
    ‫‪18‬‬
    ‫‪25 ,18 ,15 ,03‬‬
    ‫‪40 ,18‬‬
    ‫‪71 ,63 ,57 ,19‬‬
    ‫‪18‬‬
    ‫‪69 ,60 ,59‬‬
    ‫‪,54 ,48 ,40 ,18 ,17 ,15‬‬
    ‫‪64 ,60‬‬
    ‫‪18‬‬

    ‫‪40‬‬
    ‫‪69 ,59 ,50 ,18 ,15‬‬
    ‫‪45‬‬
    ‫‪86 ,67 ,59 ,56‬‬
    ‫‪70‬‬
    ‫‪88 ,87 ,61 ,59‬‬
    ‫‪40 ,15 ,03‬‬
    ‫‪15‬‬
    ‫‪,38 ,37 ,17 ,16 ,15 ,01‬‬
    ‫‪44 ,43 ,42 ,41 ,40 ,39‬‬
    ‫‪18‬‬
    ‫‪,62 ,60 ,59 ,56 ,54 ,19‬‬
    ‫‪71 ,65 ,63‬‬
    ‫‪,59 ,54 ,48 ,18 ,17 ,15‬‬
    ‫‪89 ,72 ,62 ,60‬‬

    ‫‪York‬‬

    ‫‪40‬‬

    ‫‪Yupiteru‬‬

    ‫‪03‬‬

    ‫‪Marantz‬‬

    ‫‪54 ,40‬‬

    ‫‪Zenith‬‬

    ‫‪79 ,58‬‬

    ‫‪Matsui‬‬

    ‫‪54‬‬

    ‫‪Zonda‬‬

    ‫‪01‬‬

    ‫‪MGA‬‬

    ‫‪40 ,18‬‬

    ‫‪Dongyang‬‬

    ‫‪54 ,03‬‬

    ‫‪(LG (Goldstar‬‬
    ‫‪Luxman‬‬
    ‫‪(LXI (Sears‬‬
    ‫‪Magnavox‬‬

    ‫‪Symphonic‬‬
    ‫‪Tatung‬‬
    ‫‪Techwood‬‬
    ‫‪Teknika‬‬
    ‫‪TMK‬‬
    ‫‪Toshiba‬‬
    ‫‪Vidtech‬‬
    ‫‪Videch‬‬
    ‫‪Wards‬‬
    ‫‪Yamaha‬‬

    ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪| 13‬‬

    ‫ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬

    ‫‪1‬‬

    ‫‪2‬‬

    ‫‪Admiral‬‬
    ‫)‪(M.Wards‬‬

    ‫‪58 ,57 ,56‬‬

    ‫‪Mitsubishi/MGA‬‬

    ‫‪75 ,60 ,59 ,40 ,18‬‬

    ‫‪02‬‬

    ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪AAA :‬‬

    ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺭﻛﺔ‬

    ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬

    ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺭﻛﺔ‬

    ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬



  • Page 74

    ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ‬
    ‫ﻳﺸﺮﺡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ً‬
    ‫ﻃﺮﻗﺎ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
    ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻪ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﻭﻓﺼﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬

    ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ‬
    ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬
    ‫ﺿﻌﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﺨﺰﺍﻧﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ‬
    ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
    ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ‬
    ‫ﻥﻉ ﻉﺍﻡﺕﺱﺍﻝﺍ ﻉﺽﻭﻡ ﺩﻉﺏﻱ ﻥﺃ ﻱﻍﺏﻥﻱ‬
    ‫ﻑﺍﻉﺽﺃ ‪ 3‬ﻯﻝﺇ ‪ 2.5‬ﻥﻡ ﺓﻑﺍﺱﻡﺏ ﻥﻭﻱﺯﻑﻱﻝﺕﻝﺍ‬

    ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻄﻰ‬

    ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪/‬‬
    ‫ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ)ﻳﻤﻨﻰ(‬

    ‫ﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬

    ‫‪.‬ﻥﻭﻱﺯﻑﻱﻝﺕﻝﺍ ﺓﺵﺍﺵ ﻡﺝﺡ‬
    ‫ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ )ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ(‬

    ‫ﺓﺵﺍﺵ ﻙﻱﺩﻝ ﻥﺍﻙ ﺍﺫﺇ ‪،‬ﻝﺍﺙﻡﻝﺍ ﻝﻱﺏﺱ ﻯﻝﻉ‬

    ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬

    ‫ﻉﺍﻡﺕﺱﺍﻝﺍ ﻉﺽﻭﻡ ﺩﺩﺡﻑ ‪،‬ﺓﺹﻭﺏ ‪ 46‬ﻡﺝﺡﺏ‬

    ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪/‬‬
    ‫ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ)ﻳﺴﺮﻯ(‬

    ‫ﻥﻉ ﺭﺍﺕﻡﺃ ‪ 3.50‬ﻯﻝﺇ ‪ 2.92‬ﺩﻉﺏﺕ ﺓﻑﺍﺱﻡﺏ‬
    ‫‪.‬ﺓﺵﺍﺵﻝﺍ‬

    ‫ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ )ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ(‬
    ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ‬
    ‫ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬

    ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‬

    ‫ﺿﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪ ،‬ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻮﺟﻬﺔ ﻟﻠﺪﺍﺧﻞ ) ‪ ٤٥‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ( ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻫﻚ‪.‬‬
    ‫ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻜﺒﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺃﺫﻧﻚ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‬
    ‫ﻟﻠﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ‪.‬‬

    ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻄﻰ‬

    ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻓﻀﻞ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻄﻰ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
    ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ًﺓ‬
    ‫ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﺘﻪ‪.‬‬

    ‫ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ‬

    ‫ﺿﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻀﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ‬
    ‫ﻟﺒﻌﻀﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ‪ 60‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 90‬ﺳﻢ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺃﺫﻧﻚ‪ ،‬ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ً‬
    ‫ﻗﻠﻴﻼ‪.‬‬
    ‫* ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻜﺲ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﻴﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ‬
    ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ .‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﻨﻬﻤﺎ ﺃﺑ ًﺪﺍ‪.‬‬

    ‫ﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬

    ‫ﺃﻣﺮﺍ ﻫﺎﻣًﺎ‪ .‬ﺿﻌﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ‪.‬‬
    ‫ﻻ ﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ً‬

    ‫* ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪.‬‬

    ‫ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ‬
    ‫‪SWA-6000‬‬
    ‫ﺑﺮﺍﻍ )‪(20×5‬‬
    ‫‪ٍ 16‬‬

    ‫‪ 2‬ﻛﺎﺑﻼﺕ ﻟﻠﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ‬

    ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻄﻰ‬

    ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔ‬
    ‫ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‬

    ‫| ‪14‬‬

    ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬

    ‫‪ 2‬ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
    ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﻲ‬

    ‫‪ 4‬ﺣﻮﺍﻣﻞ‬

    ‫‪ 4‬ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﺤﻮﺍﻣﻞ‬

    ‫ﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬

    ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬



  • Page 75

    ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺭﺃﺳﻲ‬

    ‫‪.5‬‬

    ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺑﺮﻏﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻣﻦ‬
    ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﻚ‪.‬‬

    ‫‪5‬‬

    ‫‪6‬‬

    ‫‪.6‬‬

    ‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ‬
    ‫ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬

    ‫‪03‬‬

    ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻪ‪.‬‬

    ‫‪3‬‬

    ‫‪4‬‬

    ‫ﺍﻗﻠﺐ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬

    ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ‬

    ‫‪.1‬‬
    ‫‪.2‬‬

    ‫ﺍﻓﺮﺩ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺿﻌﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬

    ‫‪1‬‬

    ‫‪2‬‬

    ‫ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ‬

    ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ‬

    ‫‪.3‬‬
    ‫‪.4‬‬

    ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻚ ﻟﺮﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻏﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻴﺰﺓ‪.‬‬
    ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ‬

    ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ‬

    ‫ﺃﻭ‬

    ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ‬
    ‫‪.1‬‬

    ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻠﺼﻖ‬
    ‫ﻖ‬
    ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﻞ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺎﺑﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻮﻥ ﺑﻜﻞ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ‬
    ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻛﻞ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬

    ‫‪.2‬‬

    ‫ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﻜﻞ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ‪:‬‬
    ‫‪ .a‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺾ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺧﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻚ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺾ‪.‬‬
    ‫‪ .b‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺾ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺧﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻚ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺾ‪.‬‬

    ‫‪.3‬‬

    ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻗﻮﺍﺑﺲ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻞ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﻖ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻗﻮﺍﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ‬
    ‫ﺑﺄﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬

    ‫‪.4‬‬

    ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
    ‫ﻗﻢ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺘﻮﻓﻴﻖ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺑﺲ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪.‬‬

    ‫‪.5‬‬
    ‫‪.6‬‬

    ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ‪.‬‬

    ‫ﺃﺳﻮﺩ‬

    ‫ﺃﺣﻤﺮ‬

    ‫ً‬
    ‫ﺻﻮﺗﺎ ﻳﺨﺮﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ‪.‬‬
    ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ .‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺑﺒﻌﻀﻬﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﻭﺳﺘﺴﻤﻊ‬

    ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪| 15‬‬



  • Page 76

    ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ‬
    ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻄﻰ‬
    ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔﺍ ﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔﺍ ﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪/‬‬
    ‫ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ )ﻳﺴﺮﻯ(‬
    ‫ﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬

    ‫‪R‬‬

    ‫‪FRONT TOP‬‬

    ‫‪R‬‬

    ‫‪SPEAKERS OUT‬‬

    ‫‪L‬‬

    ‫‪FRONT TOP‬‬

    ‫‪L‬‬

    ‫‪FRONT‬‬

    ‫‪CENTER‬‬

    ‫‪FRONT‬‬

    ‫‪SUBWOOFER‬‬

    ‫ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ )ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ(‬

    ‫ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ )ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ(‬

    ‫Ÿ‪IMPEDANCE : 3‬‬

    ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔﺍ ﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔﺍ ﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪/‬‬
    ‫ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ )ﻳﻤﻴﻦ(‬
    ‫‪T‬‬

    ‫‪R‬‬

    ‫‪FRONT TOP‬‬

    ‫‪FRONT‬‬

    ‫Ÿ‪IMPEDANCE : 3‬‬

    ‫* ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﻄﺮﺍﺯ ‪ SWA-6000‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬

    ‫‪SPEAKERS OUT‬‬

    ‫‪L‬‬

    ‫‪FRONT TOP‬‬

    ‫‪L‬‬

    ‫‪R‬‬

    ‫‪FRONT‬‬

    ‫‪CENTER‬‬

    ‫‪SUBWOOFER‬‬

    ‫‪L‬‬
    ‫‪ASC IN‬‬

    ‫‪N‬‬

    ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬

    ‫| ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ |‬

    ‫‪‬‬
    ‫‪‬‬
    ‫‪‬‬
    ‫‪‬‬
    ‫‪‬‬
    ‫‪‬‬
    ‫‪‬‬
    ‫‪‬‬
    ‫‪‬‬

    ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻏﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻣﻴﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺧﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﻌﻨﺪ‬
    ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ )ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻣﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻏﻲ( ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪.‬‬
    ‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﻳﻌﺒﺜﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺘﻬﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺳﻘﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
    ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﺳﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺻﺤﺔ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺒﻴﻦ )‪.(–/+‬‬
    ‫ﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﻌﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺃﻳﺪﻳﻬﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﻏﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﺮﻯ )ﻓﺘﺤﺔ( ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
    ‫ﻻ ﺗﻌﻠﻖ ﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺮﻯ )ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ(‪.‬‬
    ‫ﺇﻥ ﻫﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻣﻀﻤﻦ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﻪ ﺑﻌﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺎﻩ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
    ‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺩﺍء ﻣﺜﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ ﺑﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺧﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻱ ﻋﻮﺍﺋﻖ‪.‬‬
    ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺳﻤﺎﻉ ﺃﻱ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻳﺨﺮﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.Dolby Pro Logic II‬‬
    ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ ،2-CH‬ﻟﻦ ﺗﺴﻤﻊ ﺃﻱ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻳﺨﺮﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪.‬‬

    ‫| ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |‬

    ‫‪‬‬
    ‫‪‬‬
    ‫‪‬‬
    ‫‪‬‬
    ‫‪‬‬

    ‫ً‬
    ‫ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺸﺎ ﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻲ‪.‬‬
    ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﺿﻌﺖ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ‬
    ‫ﺿﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺧﻠﻒ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻗﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻘﻄﻊ‬
    ‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﺤﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ‪.‬‬
    ‫ً‬
    ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻓﺮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻭﻳﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺗﺮﺩﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﺒﻠﻎ ‪2.4/5.8‬‬
    ‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﺤﺪﻭﺙ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ‪.‬‬
    ‫ﺟﻴﺠﺎﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ً‬
    ‫ﺗﺒﻠﻎ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻟﻺﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ 10‬ﺃﻣﺘﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ً‬
    ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺣﺎﺋﻂ ﺧﺮﺳﺎﻧﻲ‬
    ‫ﻓﻮﻻﺫﻱ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺎﺋﻂ ﺻﻠﺐ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ً‬
    ‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ‪ ،‬ﻷﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺍﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﻻﺫ‪.‬‬
    ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻘﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﺠﺐ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء "ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻑ" ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
    ‫"‪ "5""3""1""0‬ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ "‪) ID SET‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻑ("‬
    ‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬
    ‫ﺧﻠﻒ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ِ 5‬‬

    ‫| ‪16‬‬

    ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬



  • Page 77

    ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪/‬ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‬
    ‫‪03‬‬

    ‫‪POWER‬‬

    ‫‪OPTICAL‬‬

    ‫‪DIGITAL‬‬
    ‫‪AUDIO IN‬‬

    ‫‪R‬‬

    ‫‪FRONT TOP‬‬

    ‫‪R‬‬

    ‫‪FRONT‬‬

    ‫‪SUBWOOFER‬‬

    ‫Ÿ‪IMPEDANCE : 3‬‬

    ‫‪SPEAKERS OUT‬‬

    ‫‪LAN‬‬

    ‫‪L‬‬

    ‫‪FRONT TOP‬‬

    ‫‪L‬‬

    ‫‪FRONT‬‬

    ‫‪CENTER‬‬

    ‫‪L‬‬

    ‫‪OPTICAL‬‬
    ‫‪ASC IN‬‬

    ‫‪R‬‬

    ‫‪DIGITAL‬‬
    ‫‪AUDIO IN‬‬

    ‫‪2‬‬

    ‫‪HDMI IN‬‬

    ‫‪1‬‬

    ‫‪HDMI OUT‬‬

    ‫‪L‬‬

    ‫‪R‬‬

    ‫‪2‬‬

    ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺜﺔ‬

    ‫‪OPTICAL OUT‬‬

    ‫‪HDMI IN‬‬

    ‫‪1‬‬

    ‫‪HDMI OUT‬‬

    ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬

    ‫‪AUDIO OUT‬‬

    ‫‪R‬‬

    ‫ﺃﺣﻤﺮ‬

    ‫‪W‬‬

    ‫ﺃﺑﻴﺾ‬

    ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‬

    ‫‪HDMI OUT‬‬

    ‫ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‬

    ‫‪HDMI IN‬‬

    ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
    ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﻣﻦ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ‪ HDMI OUT‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺧﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ‪ HDMI IN‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﺇﺫ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
    ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ TV SOURCE‬ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ‪ HDMI‬ﻛﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬

    ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‬
    ‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻟﻠﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ .FUNCTION‬ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ‪:‬‬
    ‫‪BT  FM  HDMI2  HDMI1  AUX  D. IN  BD/DVD‬‬

    ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻣﺪﺧﻞ ‪ : HDMI‬ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪HDMI‬‬
    ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﻣﻦ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﻣﺪﺧﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﺧﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﻣﺨﺮﺝ ‪ HDMI‬ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪  .‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ HDMI1‬ﺃﻭ ‪.HDMI2‬‬

    ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﺪﺧﻞ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻲ ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﻤﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﻨﺎﻇﺮﻱ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
    ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪) RCA‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﻓﻖ(‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﻣﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﻤﻘﺒﺲ ﻣﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪.‬‬
    ‫‪ ‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪.AUX‬‬
    ‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﻘﻮﺍﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻼﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﻤﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ‪.‬‬

    ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﺑﺼﺮﻱ ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﻤﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
    ‫ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻟﻤﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻼﺕ ﻭﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻲ )ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻓﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻔﻴﺮ(‪ .‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
    ‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺼﺮﻱ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ )ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﻓﻖ(‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﻣﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﻤﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‬
    ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪.‬‬
    ‫‪ ‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪.D. IN‬‬
    ‫| ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |‬
    ‫‪ ‬ﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻼﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ًﺓ‪.‬‬
    ‫‪ ‬ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺮﺩﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ‪ 32‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
    ‫‪ ‬ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺻﻮﺕ ‪ DTS‬ﻭ‪ Dolby Digital‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪ ،MPEG audio .‬ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺗﺪﻓﻖ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺖ‪ ،‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻡ‪.‬‬

    ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪| 17‬‬

    ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ‬

    ‫‪FM ANT‬‬

    ‫‪AUX IN‬‬
    ‫‪FM ANT‬‬

    ‫‪AUX IN‬‬

    ‫‪LAN‬‬



  • Page 78

    ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ‬
    ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬

    ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻤﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬
    ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﻤﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬

    ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬
    ‫‪FM ANT‬‬

    ‫‪POWER‬‬

    ‫‪R‬‬

    ‫‪FRONT TOP‬‬

    ‫‪FRONT‬‬

    ‫Ÿ‪IMPEDANCE : 3‬‬

    ‫‪SPEAKERS OUT‬‬

    ‫‪L‬‬

    ‫‪FRONT TOP‬‬

    ‫‪L‬‬

    ‫‪R‬‬

    ‫‪FRONT‬‬

    ‫‪CENTER‬‬

    ‫‪SUBWOOFER‬‬

    ‫‪AUX IN‬‬

    ‫‪LAN‬‬
    ‫‪OPTICAL‬‬

    ‫‪L‬‬

    ‫‪ASC IN‬‬

    ‫‪DIGITAL‬‬
    ‫‪AUDIO IN‬‬

    ‫‪R‬‬

    ‫‪2‬‬

    ‫‪HDMI IN‬‬

    ‫‪1‬‬

    ‫‪HDMI OUT‬‬

    ‫ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻙ ‪ IP‬ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬

    ‫ﻣﻮﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺳﻊ‬
    ‫)ﻣﻊ ﻣﻮﺟﻪ ﻣﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ(‬
    ‫ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ‬
    ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺳﻊ‬
    ‫ﺃﻭ‬

    ‫ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ‬
    ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺳﻊ‬

    ‫ﻣﻮﺟﻪ‬
    ‫| ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |‬
    ‫ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ‬
    ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺳﻊ‬
    ‫ﻣﻮﺩﻡ‬
    ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺳﻊ‬

    ‫| ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |‬
    ‫‪ ‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﻮﻝ ﺳﻴﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﻓﺮ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺎﺩﻡ‬
    ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ‪ .Samsung‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﻮﻓﺮ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬
    ‫)‪ (ISP‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
    ‫‪ ‬ﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻲ ‪ ،DSL‬ﺍﻟﺮﺟﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻮﺟﻪ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪.‬‬
    ‫‪ ‬ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ ،AllShare‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺒﻴﻦ‬
    ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪.‬‬
    ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪.‬‬

    ‫| ‪18‬‬

    ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬

    ‫‪ ‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﻮﺟﻪ ‪ IP‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ‪ ،DHCP‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬
    ‫‪ DHCP‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪ IP‬ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
    ‫‪ ‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﺟﻪ ‪ IP‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‬
    ‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻡ‪.‬‬
    ‫‪ ‬ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺮﻭﺗﻮﻛﻮﻻﺕ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺃﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
    ‫ ‪ (OPEN/SHARED) WEP‬ﻭ‪ (TKIP/AES) WPA-PSK‬ﻭ‬‫‪(TKIP/AES) WPA2-PSK‬‬
    ‫‪ ‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺑﻤﻮﺟﻪ ‪ IP‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ‬
    ‫ﻟﻤﻮﺟﻪ ‪ IP‬ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ ﻣﻦ ِﻗﺒﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻮﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ‬
    ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻭﻓﺸﻞ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
    ‫‪ ‬ﻟﻼﻟﺘﺰﺍﻡ ﺑﺄﺣﺪﺙ ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺷﻬﺎﺩﺓ ‪ ،Wi-Fi‬ﻻ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
    ‫ﺗﻘﺪﻣﻬﺎ ﺳﺎﻣﺴﻮﻧﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻔﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﻣﻨﻲ‬
    ‫‪ WEP‬ﺃﻭ ‪ TKIP‬ﺃﻭ ‪ TKIP-AES (WPS2‬ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻂ( ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ‬
    ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪.802.11n‬‬
    ‫‪ ‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﺤﻜﻢ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﺘﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ً‬
    ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ‬
    ‫ﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﺃﺩﺍء ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﺋﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﻦ‬
    ‫ِﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ(‪.‬‬



  • Page 79

    ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
    ‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ‬

    ‫| ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |‬
    ‫‪ ‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻭﺇﺟﺮﺍء‬
    ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ < ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ > ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺪﺩ‬
    ‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪) .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(22‬‬

    ‫‪2‬‬

    ‫ﻋﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
    ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬

    ‫‪6‬‬

    ‫ﻣﺘﺼﻔﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ‬
    ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ‪.‬‬

    ‫‪7‬‬

    ‫ﺃﺣﻤﺮ )‪ : (A‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺃﺣﻤﺮ )‪ (A‬ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ‬
    ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ‪Samsung‬‬
    ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‪.‬‬
    ‫ﺃﺯﺭﻕ )‪ : (D‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻨﻤﺎ‬
    ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ‪.‬‬

    ‫‪ ‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬

    ‫‪.1‬‬

    ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬

    ‫‪1‬‬

    ‫‪5‬‬

    ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻬﺎ ‪ :‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻴﺪﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺎﺋﻌﺔ‬
    ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻧﻮﺻﻲ ﺑﺘﻨﺰﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬

    ‫‪Apps‬‬

    ‫‪3‬‬

    ‫‪4‬‬

    ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ‬
    ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪،‬‬
    ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‬

    ‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬
    ‫▲▼◄► ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺤﺪﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.E‬‬

    ‫| ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |‬
    ‫‪ ‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺮﻛﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺧﻤﺲ ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﺩﻭﻥ‬
    ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﻄﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺮﻛﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻓﻲ‬
    ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ ‪ 20‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
    ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬

    ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
    ‫‪.1‬‬

    ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ .E‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
    ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
    ‫ﻹ‬
    ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬

    ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ‬

    ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ‬

    ‫ﻣﺘﺼﻔﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ‬

    ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬

    ‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬

    ‫‪ a‬ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ‪Screen Mirroring d Samsung‬‬

    ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
    ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬

    ‫‪6 5‬‬

    ‫‪7‬‬

    ‫ﻣﺰﺍﻳﺎ ‪Smart‬‬
    ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬

    ‫ﻋﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪ :‬ﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﻋﺮﻭﺽ‬
    ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪.‬‬
    ‫‪1‬‬

    ‫‪2‬‬

    ‫ﺍﻟﺪﻋﻢ‬

    ‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬
    ‫ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ‪4K‬‬
    ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪3D‬‬
    ‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻋﻪ‬
    ‫‪BD Wise‬‬
    ‫ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‬
    ‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ )‪(24Fs‬‬
    ‫ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ‪DVD 24Fs‬‬

    ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
    ‫‪ 16:9‬ﺃﺻﻠﻲ‬
    ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
    ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
    ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
    ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬

    ‫| ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |‬
    ‫‪ً ‬‬
    ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺪﻭﻟﺘﻚ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
    ‫‪ : Apps‬ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬
    ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬

    ‫‪.2‬‬

    ‫ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪،‬‬
    ‫ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ ﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‬
    ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬

    ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪| 19‬‬

    ‫‪04‬‬

    ‫ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻟﻐﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
    ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ‬
    ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ )ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ( ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺇﺟﺮﺍء‬
    ‫ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
    ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻗﻴﺔ ﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ‬
    ‫ً‬
    ‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ‬
    ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬

    ‫‪4‬‬

    ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ :‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻟﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺗﻔﻀﻴﻼﺗﻚ‬
    ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ‪.‬‬

    ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬

    ‫• ﻟﻦ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
    ‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ‪) OSD‬ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ( ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ‬
    ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﺔ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
    ‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺧﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪.‬‬

    ‫‪3‬‬

    ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ‪ :‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ‬
    ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ‪ USB‬ﺃﻭ‬
    ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ‪.‬‬



  • Page 80

    ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
    ‫ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
    ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
    ‫‪SLEEP‬‬

    ‫‪HOME‬‬

    ‫‪S/W‬‬
    ‫‪LEVEL‬‬

    ‫‪INFO‬‬

    ‫‪TOOLS‬‬

    ‫‪EXIT‬‬

    ‫‪RETURN‬‬

    ‫‪1‬‬

    ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪3D‬‬

    ‫‪3‬‬
    ‫‪4‬‬

    ‫‪2‬‬

    ‫‪TUNERMEMORY MO/ST‬‬

    ‫‪D‬‬

    ‫‪C‬‬

    ‫‪B‬‬

    ‫‪A‬‬

    ‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‬
    ‫ﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻋﻪ‬
    ‫‪1‬‬

    ‫ﺯﺭ ‪ : HOME‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬

    ‫‪2‬‬

    ‫ﺯﺭ ‪ : RETURN‬ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬

    ‫‪3‬‬

    ‫ﺯﺭ ‪) E‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ( ‪ /‬ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ‪:‬‬
    ‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ▲▼◄► ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ‬
    ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ‪.‬‬
    ‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ E‬ﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ‬
    ‫ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬

    ‫‪4‬‬

    ‫ﺯﺭ ‪ : EXIT‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬

    ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻠﻴﺔ‬

    ‫‪BD Wise‬‬

    ‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
    ‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬
    ‫ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪HDMI‬‬
    ‫ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ‪ .4K‬ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
    ‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ "ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ"‪.‬‬

    ‫| ‪20‬‬

    ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬

    ‫| ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |‬
    ‫‪ ‬ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻌﻴﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬
    ‫ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ‪ ،4K‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪﺋ ٍﺬ ﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ‬
    ‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ‪ 24‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬‬
    ‫ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ )ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ(‪.‬‬

    ‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
    ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.52‬‬
    ‫‪ BD Wise‬ﻫﻮ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﺎﺩﻝ‪.‬‬
    ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻨﺘﺞ ‪ Samsung‬ﻭﺗﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
    ‫‪ Samsung‬ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﻤﻴﺰﺓ ‪ BD Wise‬ﻣﻊ‬
    ‫ﺑﻌﻀﻬﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ‪ HDMI‬ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪BD‬‬
    ‫‪ Wise‬ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻳﺨﺮﺝ‬
    ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻗﺮﺹ‬
    ‫‪.Blu-ray/DVD Disc‬‬

    ‫ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‬

    ‫ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
    ‫‪ HDMI‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬
    ‫‪ BD Wise‬ﻭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭ‪ 1080p‬ﻭ‪1080i‬‬
    ‫ﻭ‪ 720p‬ﻭ‪ .576p/480p‬ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺪﺩ‬
    ‫ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻓﻴﻦ ‪ i‬ﻭ‪p‬‬
    ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺸﺎﺑﻚ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺠﻲ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
    ‫ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺯﺍﺩﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﻁ‪ ،‬ﺯﺍﺩﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ‪.‬‬

    ‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬
    ‫)‪(24Fs‬‬

    ‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ(‬
    ‫ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ )‪ً 24‬‬
    ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺧﺮﺝ ‪ HDMI‬ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬
    ‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
    ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ً 24‬‬
    ‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺤﺴﻨﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
    ‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
    ‫ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ‪ً 24‬‬
    ‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍ‪/‬‬
    ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ )‪ً 24‬‬
    ‫ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ( ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ‬
    ‫ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ‪.‬‬
    ‫• ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺇﻻ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬
    ‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ‪.1080p HDMI‬‬

    ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺷﺮﺡ ﻛﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
    ‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻓﺮﺩﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬
    ‫▲▼◄► ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺡ‬
    ‫ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
    ‫ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﻭﺻﻒ ﻣﻮﺟﺰ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
    ‫ﻭﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ً‬
    ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‬
    ‫ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪.‬‬

    ‫ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ‪4K‬‬

    ‫ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
    ‫ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪: 3D Blu-ray‬‬
    ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ‬
    ‫‪ Blu-ray‬ﻳﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‬
    ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ .3D‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻠﺖ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬
    ‫ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Smart Hub‬ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
    ‫ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ‬
    ‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
    ‫ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪ :‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ‬
    ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻲ‬
    ‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬



  • Page 81

    ‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬
    ‫‪HDMI‬‬

    ‫ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ‬
    ‫‪ HDMI‬ﻟﻴﻼﺋﻢ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ‬
    ‫)ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ(‪.‬‬

    ‫ﻟﻮﻥ ‪HDMI‬‬
    ‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻣﻖ‬

    ‫ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ‬
    ‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ‪ HDMI OUT‬ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻴﻖ‪ .‬ﻳﻮﻓﺮ‬
    ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻴﻖ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺩﻗﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻋﻤﻖ‬
    ‫ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ‪.‬‬

    ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺪﺭﺝ‬

    ‫ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ‬
    ‫ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪.DVD‬‬

    ‫ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺇﺭﺟﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬

    ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‬

    ‫ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻟﻴﻼﺋﻢ‬
    ‫ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺎﺕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬
    ‫ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ‬
    ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
    ‫ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‪) .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(54‬‬

    ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬

    ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬

    ‫ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
    ‫ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺣﺘﻰ‬
    ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
    ‫ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ‪ :‬ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‬
    ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺒﻲ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪ 6‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪-6‬‬
    ‫ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ‪ .‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺕ‬
    ‫ﺟﻬﻴﺮ ﻋﻤﻴﻖ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺭﻓﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺻﻮﺕ‬
    ‫ﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ 6‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ‪.‬‬
    ‫ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ‪ :‬ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺒﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ‬
    ‫ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ 9‬ﺃﻣﺘﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﻛﻠﻤﺎ‬
    ‫ﺑﻌﺪﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺗﻔﻊ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
    ‫ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ‪ :‬ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ‬
    ‫ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
    ‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
    ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
    ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬

    ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
    ‫ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺕ‬

    ‫ﻳﻤﻴﺰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﺠﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺤﺴﻦ‬
    ‫ﻟﺒﻴﺌﺘﻚ‪.‬‬

    ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺯﻥ‬

    ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‬

    ‫ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
    ‫ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬

    ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ‬
    ‫ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ‬

    ‫ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ‬
    ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻮﺕ ‪ Dolby Digital‬ﻭ‪Dolby‬‬
    ‫‪ Digital Plus‬ﻭ‪.Dolby True HD‬‬
    ‫ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪ :‬ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
    ‫‪ Dolby TrueHD‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ً ،‬‬
    ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ‬
    ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ‪ .Dolby TrueHD‬ﻭﻳﻘﻮﻡ‬
    ‫ً‬
    ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ‬
    ‫ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪ Dolby Digital‬ﻭ‪Dolby Digital‬‬
    ‫‪.Plus‬‬
    ‫ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ :‬ﻟﺘﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ‬
    ‫ﺿﻐﻂ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺴﻤﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
    ‫ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ :‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ‬
    ‫ﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ‪ Dolby‬ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﺔ ﻛﻠﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ‬
    ‫ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﻫﺪﻭءًﺍ ﻭﺧﻔﺾ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬

    ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺝ‬
    ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮﻱ‬

    ‫ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺝ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮﻱ‬
    ‫ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
    ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻠﻤﺰﺝ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮﻱ‬
    ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ‬
    ‫ﻣﻊ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻹﺣﺎﻃﺔ‪.‬‬

    ‫ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻈﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬
    ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ً‬
    ‫ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
    ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ‪.‬‬

    ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪| 21‬‬

    ‫‪04‬‬

    ‫ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
    ‫‪Smart Hub‬‬

    ‫ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ ﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪Smart‬‬
    ‫‪.Hub‬‬

    ‫ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
    ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﻭﺻﻠﺔ‬
    ‫‪ HDMI‬ﻭﺗﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬
    ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ )‪.(ARC‬‬
    ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
    ‫ﻭﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬
    ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻱ‬
    ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‪.‬‬
    ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
    ‫ﻭﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬
    ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
    ‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬

    ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬

    ‫ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ‪DVD‬‬
    ‫‪24Fs‬‬

    ‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍ‬
    ‫ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ ‪ DVD‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ً 24‬‬
    ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺟﻪ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ‪ .HDMI‬ﻻ‬
    ‫ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﻻ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ )‪24‬‬
    ‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
    ‫ً‬

    ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ‬

    ‫ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻄﻬﺎ‪،‬‬
    ‫ﺇﻣﺎ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻨﻤﺎ‬
    ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬



  • Page 82

    ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
    ‫ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬

    ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ‬
    ‫ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﺰﺍﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻊ‬
    ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ 0‬ﻭ‪300‬‬
    ‫ﻣﻴﻠﻠﻲ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬

    ‫ﻣﺰﺍﻳﺎ ‪Smart‬‬

    ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬
    ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬
    ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬

    ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬

    ‫ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬

    ‫ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﻔﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬
    ‫ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪.‬‬
    ‫ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺘﻊ‬
    ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺃﻭ‬
    ‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ ،AllShare Wi-Fi‬ﻭﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﺮﻗﻴﺎﺕ‬
    ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
    ‫ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬
    ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻧﻈﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻈﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﻥ‬
    ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻮﺟﻪ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪.‬‬
    ‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬
    ‫ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﺼﻠﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
    ‫ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬
    ‫| ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |‬
    ‫‪ ‬ﻟﻦ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ‬
    ‫‪ TXT.‬ﺃﻭ ‪ DOC.‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
    ‫ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬

    ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
    ‫‪AllShare‬‬

    ‫ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ‬
    ‫ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ ﻭﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
    ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻬﺎ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬

    ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬

    ‫ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
    ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
    ‫ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ )ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ‪،‬‬
    ‫ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ( ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬

    ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
    ‫‪BD-Live‬‬

    ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ‪ BD-Live‬ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
    ‫ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ‪ BD-Live‬ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬
    ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﺑﺒﻌﺾ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪Blu-ray‬‬
    ‫ً‬
    ‫ﻣﺘﺼﻼ ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪.‬‬
    ‫‪ Disc‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ‬
    ‫ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪ : BD-Live‬ﻳﺘﻴﺢ‬
    ‫ﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺋﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻨﻊ‬
    ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ‪.BD-Live‬‬
    ‫ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪ : BD‬ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪ BD‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ‬
    ‫ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪ BD-Live‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﺮﺹ‬
    ‫‪.Blu-ray Disc‬‬

    ‫| ‪22‬‬

    ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬

    ‫ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺇﻋﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‬
    ‫ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
    ‫ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺪﻓﻊ ‪:‬‬
    ‫ﻻﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
    ‫ ﺍﻟﺨﺼﺎﺋﺺ ‪ :‬ﻟﻤﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ‬
    ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
    ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺣﺴﺐ‬
    ‫ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ )‪ً (VOD‬‬
    ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻔﻪ‪.‬‬
    ‫| ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |‬

    ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻒ ‪VOD‬‬

    ‫‪ ‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ )‪ (PIN‬ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‬
    ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻫﻮ ‪.0000‬‬
    ‫‪ً ‬‬
    ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺪﻭﻟﺘﻚ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
    ‫ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ‪.‬‬

    ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ‪،‬‬
    ‫ﺳﻴﺎﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺼﻮﺻﻴﺔ‬

    ‫ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﻭﺷﺮﻭﻁ ‪Smart Hub‬‬
    ‫ﻭﺳﻴﺎﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺼﻮﺻﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
    ‫ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪Smart Hub‬‬
    ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬

    ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬
    ‫‪Smart Hub‬‬

    ‫| ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |‬
    ‫‪ ‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ )‪ (PIN‬ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‬
    ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻫﻮ ‪.0000‬‬
    ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬

    ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬

    ‫ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
    ‫ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬

    ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬

    ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻔﻀﻠﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
    ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
    ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﻟﺦ‪.‬‬
    ‫• ﻟﻦ ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺪﺩﻫﺎ ﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
    ‫ﺃﻭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺔ ﺇﻻ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ‬
    ‫ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬

    ‫ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬

    ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ‪ USB‬ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ‬
    ‫ﻣﺎﻭﺱ ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ ‪ USB‬ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬
    ‫ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ‪ :‬ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬
    ‫ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬



  • Page 83

    ‫‪.1‬‬
    ‫‪.2‬‬
    ‫‪.3‬‬

    ‫‪‬‬
    ‫‪‬‬
    ‫‪‬‬
    ‫‪‬‬

    ‫ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‬

    ‫‪.2‬‬

    ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪5‬‬
    ‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‪.‬‬
    ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ٍ 5‬‬
    ‫ﺳﺘﻌﻮﺩ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
    ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪.‬‬

    ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺎﻭﺱ ‪ USB‬ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬
    ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺤﺪﺩﻩ ﻓﻲ‬
    ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻭﺱ‪ .‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺴﻴﻄﺔ‪.‬‬

    ‫| ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |‬
    ‫‪ ‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ‬
    ‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪ BD‬ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪.‬‬

    ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪.‬‬

    ‫| ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |‬

    ‫‪‬‬

    ‫‪.1‬‬

    ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺃﻱ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬
    ‫‪.USB‬‬

    ‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻟﻮﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺄﺭﺍﺕ‬
    ‫‪ USB HID‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
    ‫ﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬
    ‫‪.HID‬‬
    ‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺩﻋﻢ ﻟﻮﺣﺎﺕ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
    ‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺩﻋﻢ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
    ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ‪ HID‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬
    ‫ﻟﺤﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻧﻘﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ‬
    ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬

    ‫ﺇﻥ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪ PIN‬ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻫﻮ ‪.0000‬‬
    ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪ PIN‬ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
    ‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﺭﻣﺰ ‪PIN‬‬
    ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
    ‫ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻒ ‪ BD‬ﺍﻷﺑﻮﻱ ‪ :‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻘﻴﻴﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ‬
    ‫‪ Blu-ray‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﺎ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
    ‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‪.‬‬
    ‫ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻒ ‪ DVD‬ﺍﻷﺑﻮﻱ ‪ :‬ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ‬
    ‫‪ DVD‬ﺑﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‬
    ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻨﻪ ﻣﺎ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻣﺰ‬
    ‫‪.PIN‬‬

    ‫ﻋﺎﻡ‬

    ‫‪Anynet+‬‬
    ‫)‪(HDMI-CEC‬‬

    ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬
    ‫ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
    ‫ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ‬
    ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
    ‫ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ‬
    ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺘﻚ‪.‬‬
    ‫ ﺷﻔﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ :‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺷﻔﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
    ‫‪ +Anynet‬ﻫﻲ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ‬
    ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻄﺔ ﺑﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ‪ Samsung‬ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
    ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻤﻴﺰﺓ ‪ +Anynet‬ﻭﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
    ‫ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
    ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪ .Samsung‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
    ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
    ‫‪ Samsung‬ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﻤﻴﺰﺓ ‪+Anynet‬‬
    ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪.HDMI‬‬
    ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
    ‫)‪ ،Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC‬ﻓﻴﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ‬
    ‫ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬

    ‫‪(1‬‬

    ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
    ‫‪ Samsung‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
    ‫)‪Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC‬‬
    ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪.HDMI‬‬

    ‫‪(2‬‬

    ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ‬
    ‫)‪ Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬
    ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬

    ‫‪ (3‬ﻟﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
    ‫)‪ Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC‬ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
    ‫ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻗﺴﻢ‬
    ‫‪ +Anynet‬ﺑﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬

    ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪| 23‬‬

    ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬

    ‫| ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |‬
    ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺇﻻ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ‬
    ‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ‪ QWERTY‬ﻓﻲ‬
    ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ‪.‬‬
    ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻭﺱ ‪ :‬ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﻣﺎﻭﺱ‬
    ‫‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
    ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻭﺱ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
    ‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺎﻭﺱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
    ‫‪ ‬ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺎﻭﺱ ﺑﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪:‬‬

    ‫‪04‬‬

    ‫ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ‪ :‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺭﻣﺰ‬
    ‫‪ PIN‬ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ‪ 4‬ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
    ‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‪.‬‬
    ‫‪ ‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻧﺴﻴﺖ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪ PIN‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‬



  • Page 84

    ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
    ‫‪DivX® Video‬‬
    ‫‪On Demand‬‬

    ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪DivX® VOD‬‬
    ‫ﻟﺸﺮﺍء ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪DivX® VOD‬‬
    ‫ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
    ‫ﺍﻟﺪﻋﻢ‬
    ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻄﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻮﻛﻼء ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ‬
    ‫‪ Samsung‬ﺑﺘﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﻣﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬
    ‫ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬
    ‫ﻧﺸﻂ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﻲ‬
    ‫ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ‪.‬‬

    ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬

    ‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ‬
    ‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "ﺗﺮﻗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ"‬
    ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪.28‬‬

    ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬

    ‫ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ‬
    ‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺰﻝ‪ ،‬ﻓﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻝ‬
    ‫ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
    ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﻊ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺠﺰﺋﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬

    ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑـ‬
    ‫‪Samsung‬‬

    ‫ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
    ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﻟﻤﻨﺘﺠﻚ‪.‬‬

    ‫ﺇﻉ‪ .‬ﺽ‬

    ‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺕ )‪ (ASC‬ﻟﻤﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ‬
    ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ‬
    ‫ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ‪7.1‬‬
    ‫ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﺤﺴﻨﺔ ﻟﺘﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻴﺌﺘﻚ‪.‬‬

    ‫ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
    ‫ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻋﺪﺍ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻭ‪Smart‬‬
    ‫‪ ،Hub‬ﺛﻢ ﺑﺪء ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ‬
    ‫ﻣﻨﻚ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ )‪(PIN‬‬
    ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‬
    ‫)‪ (PIN‬ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻫﻮ‬
    ‫‪.0000‬‬

    ‫‪FM ANT‬‬

    ‫‪FRON‬‬

    ‫‪FRON‬‬

    ‫‪L‬‬

    ‫‪R‬‬

    ‫‪FRONT‬‬

    ‫‪CENTER‬‬

    ‫‪FRONT‬‬

    ‫‪SUBWOOFER‬‬

    ‫‪SPEAKERS OUT‬‬

    ‫ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﺓ‬
    ‫ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬

    ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺕ‬

    ‫Ÿ‪IMPEDANCE : 3‬‬

    ‫‪AUX IN‬‬

    ‫‪LAN‬‬
    ‫‪OPTICAL‬‬

    ‫‪L‬‬

    ‫‪ASC IN‬‬

    ‫‪DIGITAL‬‬
    ‫‪AUDIO IN‬‬

    ‫‪R‬‬

    ‫ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ‪ASC‬‬

    ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺕ‬
    ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻣﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻄﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
    ‫• ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ :‬ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ً‬
    ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
    ‫• ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ :‬ﻳﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﺻﻮﺕ ً‬
    ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ‬
    ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻤﺖ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬

    ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ‬
    ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬

    ‫‪.1‬‬

    ‫ﻭﺻﻞ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ‪ ASC‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ‪. ASC IN‬‬

    ‫‪ .2‬ﺿﻊ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ‪ ASC‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ‪.‬‬
    ‫• ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ‬
    ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪ .‬ﺃﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺃﻳﺴﺮ ‪ ‬ﺗﻮﺳﻴﻂ ‪ ‬ﺃﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺃﻳﻤﻦ ‪‬‬
    ‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﺤﻴﻄﻲ ﺃﻳﻤﻦ ‪ ‬ﺃﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﻋﻠﻮﻱ ﺃﻳﻤﻦ ‪ ‬ﺃﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﻋﻠﻮﻱ‬
    ‫ﺃﻳﺴﺮ ‪ ‬ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﺤﻴﻄﻲ ﺃﻳﺴﺮ ‪ ‬ﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
    ‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ RETURN‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
    ‫ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬

    ‫| ‪24‬‬

    ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬



  • Page 85

    ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬

    ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬

    ‫| ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |‬

    ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ‬
    ‫ﻛﻨﺖ ﺑﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
    ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺒﺪﺃ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﺰﻭﺩ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻟﻠﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻣﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ‬
    ‫‪ IP‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ً‬
    ‫ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺎ ﺃﻡ ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬
    ‫ﺃﻭ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻨﻮﺻﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
    ‫ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‬
    ‫ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﻣﺤﻠﻴﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺪء ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ‪.‬‬
    ‫ﻟﺒﺪء ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬

    ‫‪ ‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺤﺪﺩ‬
    ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‬
    ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.26‬‬
    ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬
    ‫ﻓﺸﻞ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
    ‫ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪MAC‬‬

    ‫‪.1‬‬
    ‫‪.2‬‬
    ‫‪ .3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.E‬‬
    ‫‪ .4‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬

    ‫‪XX:XX:XX:XX:XX:XX‬‬

    ‫ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪IP‬‬

    ‫‪0 .0 .0 .0‬‬

    ‫ﻗﻨﺎﻉ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﻓﺮﻋﻴﺔ‬

    ‫‪0 .0 .0 .0‬‬

    ‫ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬
    ‫ّ‬
    ‫ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ‪DNS‬‬

    ‫‪0 .0 .0 .0‬‬
    ‫‪0 .0 .0 .0‬‬

    ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.E‬‬

    ‫ً‬
    ‫ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‬
    ‫ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪ .‬ﺟﺮﺏ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪ :‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻤﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪IP‬‬

    ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.E‬‬

    ‫ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ .IP‬ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﻮﻓﺮ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬

    ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬

    ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪IP‬‬

    ‫ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ‬

    ‫ﺇﻏﻼﻕ‬

    ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.26‬‬

    ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬

    ‫‪.2‬‬

    ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ◄► ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ ،IP‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
    ‫‪ .E‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪.IP‬‬

    ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 3‬ﺑﺎﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪:‬‬

    ‫‪.3‬‬
    ‫‪.4‬‬

    ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ ،IP‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻄﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬

    ‫❑‬

    ‫ﺳﻠﻜﻲ ‪ -‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬

    ‫‪.1‬‬

    ‫ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﺒﻞ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪،‬‬
    ‫ً‬
    ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻ‬
    ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ .E‬ﺣﻴﻨﺌ ٍﺬ ﻳﻜﺘﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬
    ‫ﺳﻠﻜﻴًّﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺛﻢ ﻳﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪.‬‬

    ‫‪.2‬‬

    ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.E‬‬

    ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ )ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪ ،IP‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
    ‫‪ .E‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‬
    ‫ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
    ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ▲▼‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ◄► ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ‬
    ‫ﻣﻦ ﺣﻘﻞ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻵﺧﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﻘﻴﻤﺔ‬
    ‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.E‬‬

    ‫‪.5‬‬

    ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ▲ ﺃﻭ ▼ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
    ‫ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻟﺘﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.4‬‬

    ‫‪.6‬‬

    ‫ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ‪ 4‬ﻭ‪ 5‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻞء ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
    ‫ّ‬

    ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪| 25‬‬

    ‫‪04‬‬

    ‫‪.1‬‬

    ‫ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﺒﻞ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪،‬‬
    ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.E‬‬
    ‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺣﻴﻨﺌ ٍﺬ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﺸﻞ‬
    ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬

    ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬

    ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬
    ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ‪ Smart Hub‬ﻭ‪ BD-LIVE‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
    ‫ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﺔ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
    ‫ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ‬
    ‫ﻓﺼﻞ "ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ" ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ 43‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ .51‬ﻭﺗﺒﺪﺃ‬
    ‫ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪.‬‬

    ‫❑‬

    ‫ﺳﻠﻜﻲ ‪ -‬ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‬

    ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪ IP‬ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
    ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
    ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 3‬ﺑﺎﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪:‬‬



  • Page 86

    ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
    ‫‪.4‬‬

    ‫| ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |‬
    ‫‪ ‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻘﺪﻡ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪.‬‬

    ‫‪.7‬‬

    ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
    ‫‪ .E‬ﻳﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ‬
    ‫ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪.‬‬

    ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬

    ‫❑‬

    ‫ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ ‪ -‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬

    ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 3‬ﻓﻲ " ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ" ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‬
    ‫‪:25‬‬

    ‫‪.1‬‬

    ‫ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪.‬‬
    ‫ﻳﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻭﻳﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬

    ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬
    ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺷﺒﻜﺘﻚ‪.‬‬
    ‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬

    ‫ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬

    ‫ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬
    ‫‪si-ap‬‬
    ‫‪iptime‬‬
    ‫‪iptime5G‬‬
    ‫‪KIMING_VTOWER‬‬
    ‫‪TIAS‬‬
    ‫ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ‬

    ‫‪.2‬‬
    ‫‪.3‬‬

    ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺑﻠﻮ ﺭﺍﻱ‬
    ‫ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪ .‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ‬
    ‫ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬

    ‫)‪WPS(PBC‬‬

    ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.E‬‬
    ‫ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
    ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ‬
    ‫ً‬
    ‫ﺣﺮﻭﻓﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
    ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪ .‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ‬
    ‫ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ▲▼◄►‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.E‬‬

    ‫| ‪26‬‬

    ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬

    ‫| ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |‬
    ‫ﻗﺎﺩﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺑﺈﺣﺪﻯ‬
    ‫‪ ‬ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ً‬
    ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻣﺘﻬﺎ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺩﻡ‪.‬‬
    ‫❑‬

    ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﺒﻌًﺎ ﺛﻼﺙ ﻃﺮﻕ‪:‬‬
    ‫ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬‫ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‬‫ )‪WPS(PBC‬‬‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﺃﻱ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬
    ‫ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﺇﻥ‬
    ‫ﻭﺟﺪ‪.‬‬

    ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻢ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ .E‬ﻳﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ‬
    ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺛﻢ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪.‬‬

    ‫ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ ‪ -‬ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‬

    ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪ IP‬ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
    ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
    ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 3‬ﻓﻲ "ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ" ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‬
    ‫‪:25‬‬

    ‫‪.1‬‬

    ‫ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪.‬‬
    ‫ﻳﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻭﻳﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬

    ‫‪.2‬‬

    ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺿﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
    ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.E‬‬

    ‫‪.3‬‬

    ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺩﺕ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ،2‬ﻓﺎﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.6‬‬
    ‫ﺃﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺩﺕ ﺃﺿﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.4‬‬

    ‫‪ .4‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪.‬‬
    ‫• ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬
    ‫ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
    ‫ً‬
    ‫ﺣﺮﻭﻓﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬
    ‫• ﺃﺩﺧﻞ‬
    ‫▲▼◄►‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.E‬‬
    ‫• ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮﺓ )ﺃﻭ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ‬
    ‫‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
    ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ‬
    ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.E‬‬
    ‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪‬‬
    ‫• ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﻗﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪،&123#‬‬
    ‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‪‬‬
    ‫‪ .E‬ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪،&123#‬‬
    ‫‪.E‬‬
    ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪‬‬
    ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻢ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.E‬‬
    ‫‪ .5‬ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ▲▼ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻮﻉ‬
    ‫ﺃﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ .E‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ‬
    ‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
    ‫• ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬
    ‫ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
    ‫ً‬
    ‫ﺣﺮﻭﻓﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬
    ‫• ﺃﺩﺧﻞ‬
    ‫▲▼◄►‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.E‬‬
    ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻢ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ .E‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬
    ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪.‬‬



  • Page 87

    ‫‪.6‬‬

    ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﺸﻞ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ◄► ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
    ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ ،IP‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.E‬‬

    ‫‪.7‬‬
    ‫‪.8‬‬

    ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ )ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪ ،IP‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
    ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ .E‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ‬
    ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
    ‫ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ▲▼‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ◄► ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
    ‫ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺣﻘﻞ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻵﺧﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء‬
    ‫ﻣﻦ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.E‬‬

    ‫‪.3‬‬

    ‫‪.4‬‬

    ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.E‬‬

    ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ▲ ﺃﻭ ▼ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
    ‫ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻟﺘﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.8‬‬

    ‫ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ‪ 8‬ﻭ‪ 9‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻞء ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
    ‫‪ّ .10‬‬

    ‫‪04‬‬

    ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ ،IP‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻄﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬

    ‫‪.2‬‬

    ‫ﺣﺪﺩ )‪ ،WPS(PBC‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.E‬‬
    ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ WPS(PBC‬ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻮﺟﻪ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺘﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﻳﺤﺼﻞ‬
    ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺤﺘﺎﺟﻬﺎ ﻭﻳﺘﺼﻞ‬
    ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪.‬‬
    ‫ﻳﺘﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪.‬‬

    ‫| ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |‬
    ‫‪ ‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ ،WPS‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺸﻔﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬
    ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ .AES‬ﻻ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﻔﻴﺮ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ‪ WEP‬ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪.WPS‬‬

    ‫| ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |‬

    ‫ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬

    ‫‪ ‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻘﺪﻡ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪.‬‬

    ‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬
    ‫ﻭﺑﺒﻌﻀﻬﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﻧﻈﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻈﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻣﻮﺟﻪ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪.‬‬

    ‫‪ .11‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ .E‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
    ‫ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‪.‬‬
    ‫‪ .12‬ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ‬
    ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ‪ .‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬
    ‫ً‬
    ‫ﺣﺮﻭﻓﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ‬
    ‫ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪ .‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ‬
    ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ▲▼◄►‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.E‬‬
    ‫‪ .13‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
    ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ .E‬ﻳﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺛﻢ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
    ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪.‬‬
    ‫‪ .14‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
    ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.E‬‬
    ‫| ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |‬
    ‫‪ ‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻟﻠﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
    ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ > ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ > ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪.‬‬
    ‫‪WPS(PBC) ‬‬

    ‫| ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |‬
    ‫‪ ‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ AllShare‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
    ‫ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ‪ .Wi-Fi‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
    ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻣﺘﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
    ‫‪ ‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻣﻊ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪ .‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
    ‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪ ،‬ﻧﻮﺻﻲ ﺑﺸﺪﺓ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
    ‫ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
    ‫‪ .1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻭﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
    ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬

    ‫‪.2‬‬
    ‫‪ .3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.E‬‬
    ‫‪ .4‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ‪ ،Wi-Fi‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.E‬‬

    ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.E‬‬

    ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬

    ‫ﻳُﻌﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ )‪ WPS(PBC‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺳﻬﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻕ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
    ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺯﺭ )‪ ،WPS(PBC‬ﻓﺎﺗﺒﻊ‬
    ‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ‪:‬‬
    ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 3‬ﻓﻲ " ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ" ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‬
    ‫‪:25‬‬

    ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪| 27‬‬

    ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬

    ‫‪.9‬‬

    ‫‪.1‬‬

    ‫ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪.‬‬
    ‫ﻳﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻭﻳﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬



  • Page 88

    ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
    ‫‪.4‬‬
    ‫ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
    ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ‪[HTS]F9750W :‬‬
    ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬
    ‫‪AndroidXXXXXXX‬‬

    ‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻖ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻠﻴﻪ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻖ ﻹﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
    ‫ُﺪﺭﺟﺎ ﺑﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
    ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻐﻠﻖ‪ ،‬ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻣ ً‬
    ‫ﻛﻤﺘﺼﻞ‪.‬‬

    ‫| ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |‬

    ‫ﻣﻔﺼﻮﻝ‬

    ‫ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ‬

    ‫‪ ‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻜﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻚ‬
    ‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬
    ‫‪ ‬ﻟﻦ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ‪ TXT.‬ﺃﻭ ‪ DOC.‬ﻋﻨﺪ‬
    ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬

    ‫ﺇﻏﻼﻕ‬

    ‫ﺗﺮﻗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
    ‫‪ .5‬ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺛﻼﺙ ﻃﺮﻕ ﻹﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪:Wi-Fi‬‬
    ‫• ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬
    ‫• ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪.PBC‬‬
    ‫• ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪.PIN‬‬
    ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﻛﻞ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺮﺡ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬

    ‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
    ‫‪.1‬‬

    ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ ،Wi-Fi‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬
    ‫ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺁﺧﺮ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
    ‫ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬

    ‫‪.2‬‬

    ‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍ ﻣﻨﺒﺜﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
    ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء‪ ،‬ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺮﻯ ً‬
    ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﻳﻔﻴﺪ ﺑﺄﻥ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻗﺪ ﻃﻠﺐ‬
    ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ E‬ﻟﻘﺒﻮﻝ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬

    ‫‪.3‬‬

    ‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻖ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻠﻴﻪ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻖ ﻹﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
    ‫ُﺪﺭﺟﺎ ﺑﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
    ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻐﻠﻖ‪ ،‬ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻣ ً‬
    ‫ﻛﻤﺘﺼﻞ‪.‬‬

    ‫• ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺇﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ‪ PBC‬ﻭ ‪ PIN‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬

    ‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪PBC‬‬
    ‫‪.1‬‬

    ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
    ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.E‬‬

    ‫‪.2‬‬

    ‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻖ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻠﻴﻪ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻖ ﻹﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
    ‫ُﺪﺭﺟﺎ ﺑﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
    ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻐﻠﻖ‪ ،‬ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻣ ً‬
    ‫ﻛﻤﺘﺼﻞ‪.‬‬

    ‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪PIN‬‬
    ‫‪.1‬‬

    ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
    ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.E‬‬

    ‫‪.2‬‬
    ‫‪.3‬‬

    ‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻖ ‪.PIN‬‬
    ‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪ PIN‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻖ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻟﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻞ‬
    ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬

    ‫| ‪28‬‬

    ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬

    ‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﺔ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻨﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
    ‫ﺍﻷﺩﺍء ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
    ‫ً‬
    ‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬
    ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ‬
    ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ‪.‬‬

    ‫‪.1‬‬
    ‫‪.2‬‬
    ‫‪ .3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.E‬‬
    ‫‪ .4‬ﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻵﻥ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻵﻥ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬

    ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.E‬‬
    ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺪﻋﻢ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.E‬‬

    ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ .E‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻵﻥ" ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
    ‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬

    ‫‪.5‬‬

    ‫ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺍ‪،‬‬
    ‫ﻟﻠﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ‬
    ‫ً‬
    ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ .E‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ‬
    ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ" ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬

    ‫| ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |‬

    ‫‪‬‬
    ‫‪‬‬
    ‫‪‬‬
    ‫‪‬‬

    ‫ﺗﻜﺘﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻗﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻠﻘﺎء ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
    ‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
    ‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﺤﻤﻞ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪ Samsung Electronics‬ﺃﻱ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺔ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺣﻴﺎﻝ‬
    ‫ﺃﻱ ﺧﻠﻞ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻟﻌﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻫﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻴﻞ‬
    ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺮﻗﻴﺔ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
    ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻗﻴﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻗﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
    ‫‪.E‬‬
    ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻡ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ "‪) "UPDATE‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ(‬
    ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬



  • Page 89

    ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻵﻥ‬

    ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪USB‬‬

    ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ "ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻵﻥ" ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬
    ‫ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ USB‬ﻣﺤﻤﻮﻝ‪ .‬ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪.‬‬
    ‫ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ USB‬ﻣﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‪.‬‬

    ‫‪.1‬‬
    ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪ SUPPORT‬ﻓﻲ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
    ‫‪ .3‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ‬

    ‫‪.4‬‬
    ‫‪.5‬‬

    ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻋﺜﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻖ "ﻃﻠﺐ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ"‪.‬‬
    ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ‪ .‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺘﺮﻗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
    ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬

    ‫‪.6‬‬

    ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬
    ‫ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
    ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ "ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ"‪.‬‬

    ‫‪.7‬‬

    ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺈﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻗﻴﺔ‪.‬‬

    ‫| ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |‬
    ‫‪ ‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺤﺺ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻓﻲ ﺟﺰء ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
    ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺸﺎﺷﺔ "ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪."Samsung‬‬
    ‫‪ ‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺮﻗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ‬
    ‫ﺧﻠﻞ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬

    ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬

    ‫‪.4‬‬
    ‫‪.5‬‬

    ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺑﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻭﺱ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤُﻨﺴﺪﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
    ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ‬
    ‫‪.Firmware Manuals & Downloads‬‬

    ‫‪.6‬‬
    ‫‪.7‬‬
    ‫‪ .8‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪ Send‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻖ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ‪.‬‬
    ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪ Firmware‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‪.‬‬

    ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺯﺭ ‪ ZIP‬ﻓﻲ ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‪.‬‬

    ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪ OK‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻖ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ‬
    ‫ﻭﺣﻔﻈﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬

    ‫‪.9‬‬

    ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﻚ ﺿﻐﻂ ﺃﺭﺷﻴﻒ ‪ zip‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ .‬ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﻣُﺠﻠﺪ‬
    ‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻳﺤﻤﻞ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ‪.zip‬‬

    ‫‪ .10‬ﺍﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣُﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ‪.‬‬
    ‫‪ .11‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ‬
    ‫‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪ USB‬ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬
    ‫‪ .12‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ < ﺍﻟﺪﻋﻢ < ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
    ‫‪ .13‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻵﻥ‪.‬‬
    ‫‪ .14‬ﻳﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻤﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ .USB‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ‬
    ‫ﻳﺠﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻖ "ﻃﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ"‪.‬‬
    ‫‪ .15‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ‪ .‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺘﺮﻗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
    ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬

    ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﺔ‬
    ‫ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
    ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
    ‫ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺑﻪ ً‬
    ‫ﻧﺸﻄﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻗﻴﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬
    ‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‪.‬‬

    ‫‪‬‬

    ‫‪.1‬‬

    ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ▲▼ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
    ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.E‬‬

    ‫‪‬‬

    ‫‪.2‬‬

    ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
    ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬
    ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﺎﻡ‬
    ‫ﺑﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺴﺄﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺘﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
    ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬

    ‫| ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |‬

    ‫‪‬‬
    ‫‪‬‬

    ‫ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺃﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ‬
    ‫‪.USB‬‬
    ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺤﺺ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻓﻲ ﺟﺰء ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
    ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺸﺎﺷﺔ "ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪."Samsung‬‬
    ‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺮﻗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ‬
    ‫ﺧﻠﻞ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬
    ‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﺮﻗﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ‪ USB‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ‬
    ‫ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ USB‬ﻣﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬

    ‫| ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |‬
    ‫ً‬
    ‫ﻣﺘﺼﻼ ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪.‬‬
    ‫‪ ‬ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬

    ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪| 29‬‬

    ‫‪04‬‬

    ‫‪.2‬‬
    ‫‪.3‬‬

    ‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻋﻦ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﻟﻠﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
    ‫ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻌﺜﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻖ "ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺜﺎﺕ‬
    ‫ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻵﻥ‪ .".‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ E‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ‪.‬‬

    ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻨﺴﺪﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯ‪.‬‬

    ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬

    ‫‪.1‬‬

    ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻵﻥ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ .E‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻖ‬
    ‫"ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻵﻥ"‪.‬‬

    ‫ﺗﻔﻀﻞ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺭﺓ ‪.www.samsung.com‬‬



  • Page 90

    ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‬
    ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ‬
    ‫‪ Blu-ray/DVD/CD‬ﻭﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪ USB‬ﻭﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ‬
    ‫ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻴﺔ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ‪.‬‬
    ‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
    ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ‬
    ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ً‬
    ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ‪ AllShare‬ﻭﺗﺜﺒﻴﺘﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻥ‬
    ‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ‪ DLNA‬ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬

    ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‬
    ‫‪.1‬‬
    ‫‪.2‬‬

    ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
    ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ USB‬ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ ‪ USB‬ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ .‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ‬
    ‫ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ"‪.‬‬
    ‫ﻳ‬
    ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯﺯ‬
    ‫"ﺗﻢ ﻮ ﻴ‬
    ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻖ ﻢ‬
    ‫ﻖ‬
    ‫ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‬
    ‫ﻹ ﺭ‬

    ‫| ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |‬
    ‫‪ ‬ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ Windows 7‬ﻭ‪ Windows 8‬ﺑﻬﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
    ‫‪ (Play To) DLNA‬ﻣﻀﻤﻦ‪.‬‬

    ‫‪Apps‬‬

    ‫ﻋﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
    ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬

    ‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
    ‫ﻝﻭﻡﺡﻡ ‪ USB‬ﺹﺭﻕ‬
    ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬

    ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬

    ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
    ‫ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‬
    ‫ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬

    ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‪ ،‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺗﻬﺎ‬
    ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﻫﻲ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﺘﻚ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻟﻠﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‬
    ‫ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻭﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺇﻣﺎ ﻣﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ًﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
    ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬

    ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
    ‫ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‬
    ‫ﺑﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.E‬‬

    ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
    ‫‪.1‬‬
    ‫‪.2‬‬

    ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ‬
    ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪،‬‬
    ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪ‬
    ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﻮ‬
    ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‬

    ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ‬

    ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ‬

    ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ‬

    ‫ﻣﺘﺼﻔﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ‬

    ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬

    ‫| ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |‬
    ‫‪ ‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻖ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
    ‫‪ .3‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ▲▼ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻞ‬
    ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ً .E‬‬
    ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‪،‬‬
    ‫ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﻟﻚ ﺇﻣﺎ ﻣﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻔﺮﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻛﻼﻫﻤﺎ‪.‬‬

    ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ‬ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺩﺭﺝ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ‪.‬‬

    ‫| ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |‬

    ‫ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺝ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻠﺼﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
    ‫ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻬًﺎ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬

    ‫‪ ‬ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺳﻴﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﻟﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻟﻦ‬
    ‫ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻻ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺣﺪﺩﺗﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ .3‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬
    ‫ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‬
    ‫ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ ،AllShare Play‬ﺛﻢ‬
    ‫ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ 4‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
    ‫‪ .4‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ▲▼◄► ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
    ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ‪.E‬‬

    ‫‪.5‬‬
    ‫‪.6‬‬
    ‫‪.3‬‬

    ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺩﺭﺝ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ‪.‬‬
    ‫ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬

    ‫‪.4‬‬

    ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ 6‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ‬
    ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ" ﺑﺎﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬

    ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪USB‬‬
    ‫ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺘﺎﻥ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﻤﺎ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬
    ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ USB‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﻨﺘﺠﻚ‪.‬‬

    ‫| ‪30‬‬

    ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬

    ‫‪.7‬‬

    ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻟﻌﺮﺿﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ‪.E‬‬
    ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ‪ RETURN‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺯﺭ ‪ Exit‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ‬
    ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﺔ‪.‬‬
    ‫ﺍﺫﻫﺐ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪ 32‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 40‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
    ‫ﺗﻮﺿﺢ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
    ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪.USB‬‬

    ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
    ‫‪.1‬‬
    ‫‪.2‬‬
    ‫‪ .3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
    ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬

    ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ USB‬ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ ‪ USB‬ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬
    ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.E‬‬



  • Page 91

    ‫‪.4‬‬

    ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ▲▼◄► ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
    ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.E‬‬

    ‫‪.5‬‬

    ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ◄►▲▼ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻟﻌﺮﺿﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
    ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.E‬‬

    ‫‪05‬‬

    ‫| ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ |‬

    ‫‪.6‬‬

    ‫‪ ‬ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺳﻴﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﻟﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻟﻦ‬
    ‫ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻻ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺣﺪﺩﺗﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ .4‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬
    ‫ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‬
    ‫ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪AllShare Play‬‬
    ‫ﻭﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.4‬‬
    ‫‪ .5‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ◄► ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
    ‫‪.E‬‬

    ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ RETURN‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ‬
    ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
    ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
    ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬

    ‫‪.7‬‬

    ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‬

    ‫‪.4‬‬

    ‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ 32‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 40‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
    ‫ﺗﻮﺿﺢ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟ